II ■ • ■ . 
 
 VIELE 
 
 ON 
 
 FIELD FOBTIFICATTONS 
 
 f 
 
 AN1> 
 
 ARTILLERl 
 
 "W^ I T H P I. ^ T E S . 
 
 I : .1. Av. i;andqlph, 
 
 IJI Main ISireet.. Richmond, ViROiNt*. 
 
 

 ^ 
 
 TREASUR KQQfcd 
 
 COL. GEORGE WASHINGTON FLOWERS 
 MEMORIAL COLLECTION 
 
 DUKE UNIVERSITY LIBRARY 
 DURHAM, N. C. 
 
 PRESENTED BY 
 
 W. W. FLOWERS 
 
^ sjr"^* 
 
 > \? I 
 
 ¥~ 
 
-^^si-a-^ 
 
^004 '^.lo^ci 
 
 cJf7 vvC t^ 
 
Profile and Outline of a Bastion Front Field Work. 
 
HAND-BOOK 
 
 OP 
 
 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS 
 
 AND 
 
 JLEyTIXjLEI^"^; 
 
 ALSO 
 
 MANUAL 
 
 FOR 
 
 LIGHT AND HEAYY ARTILLEIY. 
 
 WITH ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 BY 
 
 EGBERT L. VIELE, 
 
 LATE U. S. A. 
 <3APTAIN ENQINBERS, SEVENTH REGIMENT, N. G, 
 
 J. W. RANDOLPH, 
 
 121 MAIN ST., RICHMOND, VA- 
 
 1861. 
 
E R0WE1?S COLLECTION ^^ 
 
 1 ■ 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 Field works are any constructions which have for their object 
 to impede the advance of an enemy, or to enable an inferior force 
 to maintain their position against the attack of a supe ior number. 
 
 The name of field forticatlon is applied to a work which is com- 
 posed of an embankment of earth called a "parapet," and an ex- 
 cavation called a "ditch," on the exterior side which last furnishes 
 the earth for the embankment. 
 
 The outline or form of the work varies with the character of the 
 ground, the circumstances under which it is constructed, the 
 strength of the force, and particular character of the defence. The 
 profile or shape of the embankment or parapet is usually the same 
 in all cases- 
 
 When the ground about a work within effective range of the fire- 
 arms of the attacking party is quite flat, the height, called the 
 " command" of the work, must be at least 7 feefc 6 inches, in order 
 that the defenders may be covered from the fire of men on horse- 
 back — that class of troops being able to discharge their arms at 7 
 feet 6 inches above the ground. - 
 
 Unimportant works, or such as arc situated on higher ground 
 than that within effective artillery range, may have their parapets 
 as low as 6 feet, or even 5 feet. 
 
 Fig-. 1, — Plate 2 shows the ordinary form of the profile of an in- 
 trench men t, in soils of which the natural slope is one perpendicular 
 to one base. 
 
 A B C D E F is the profile of the Parapet. 
 
 G H I K tlie profile of the Ditch. 
 
 L M N the profile of tlie Glacis. 
 
 A B the Banquette Slopes. 
 
 B C Tread of the Banquette. 
 
 C D the Interior Slope. 
 
 D E the Superior Slope. 
 
 E F tlie Exterior Slope. 
 
 F G the Berm. 
 
 G H the Scarp. 
 
 268114 
 
4 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 H I the Bottom of the Ditch. 
 
 I K the Counterscarp. 
 
 A tUte Foot of the Banquette Slope. 
 
 B the Crest of the Banquette. 
 
 C the Foot of the Interior Slope. 
 
 D the Interior Crest. 
 
 E the Exterior Crest. 
 
 F the Foot of the Exterior Slope. 
 
 G the Crest of the Scarp. 
 
 H the Foot of the Scarp. 
 
 I the Foot of the Counterscarp. 
 
 K the Crest of the Counterscarp. 
 
 M the Crest of the Glacis. 
 
 N the Foot of the Glacis. 
 
 Fig. 2 shows the general plan of intrenchments with flanking ar- 
 rangements. 
 
 O A B and E F P are the Advanced Parts. 
 
 B C D E are the Retired Parts. 
 
 A 0, A B, E F, and F P are the Faces. 
 
 B C and D E are the Flanks. 
 
 C D the Curtains. 
 
 A D and C F the Lines of Defence. 
 
 O A B and E F P are the Salient Angles. 
 
 BCD and C D E the Re-entering Angles. 
 
 A D F and B C F the Angles of Defence. 
 
 b A c and e F g the Sectors without Fire, 
 
 L M and N R the Capitals. 
 
 Sometimes the parapet* is formed of earth taken from an excava- 
 tion or trench inside of it; in this case a parapet may be as low as 
 B feet, because, then, the defenders standing in the trench of equal 
 depth, and close behind the parapet, are sufficiently covered by it. 
 
 Should there be ground near the position to be fortified, higher 
 than that on which the parapet stands, the latter must then have a 
 greater command than 7 feet 6 inches, but in the more simple kind of 
 field works the command does not exceed 12 feet; for as soldiers 
 cannot easily throw earth with a shovel to a greater heisjht than 6 
 feet^ and as other means are generally wanting in the field, it is evi- 
 dent that the height of a parapet for such a work, must be limited 
 by the capability of executing it with shovels and pickaxes by two 
 parties of men, one standing on a level 6 feet above the other. The 
 game reason determines the greatest depth of ditch to be 12 feet, a 
 
 * In this manner cover for troops may be very quickly obtained, with 
 the advantage of having the power to advance over the parapet in order 
 of battle when occasion offers. 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 5 
 
 scaffolding being necessary at 6 feet above the bottom of the ditch 
 to receive the earth which is thrown from tlience ; the earth is then 
 thrown up to the level of the ground, by other laborers placed on 
 the scaffolding. 
 
 In the construction of field works it should always be recollected 
 that a great command of parapet not only requires additional means, 
 trouble, and time to throw up the earth, but also renders necessary 
 an increased mass of earth for the banquette, which may thus en- 
 cumber the interior of the work. 
 
 To obviate, as much as possible, the latter evil, it is usual to 
 mount the banquette, by steps, when the parapet has a greater com- 
 mand than 8 feet. 
 
 The thickness of the parapets of field works must be regulated 
 by the description of arms likely to be employed a^jainst them; in 
 order, therefore, that they may afford a reasonable degree of resis- 
 tance to repeated firing, the thickness of parapets must somewhat 
 exceed the penetration of the shot which may be used in the at- 
 tack. 
 
 Penetration of shot. Thickness of parapet. 
 MusUet ball, 10 to 18 inches, 3 fen&t. 
 
 6 — pounder, 3^ to 4 feet. 6 feet. 
 
 9 — pounder, 6^ to 7 feet. 8 or 9 feet. 
 
 12— pounder, 8| to 10 feet. 10 or 12 feet. 
 
 It is found by experiment that loose earth resists the penetration 
 of shot just as well as that which has been rammed together. 
 
 Although a musket ball penetrates, at most, only 18 inches into 
 earth, musketry parapets require to be made 3 feet thick, in order 
 that they may be sufficiently substantial to preserve the requisite 
 height, notwithstanding the action of the weather. 
 
 Heavier guns than 12-pounders are rarely brought into the field, 
 consequently 12 feet may be considered as the greatest thickness of 
 a parapet; and it has been shown that, for the simpler works, 12 
 feet is the greatest command of a parapet, and likewise the greatest 
 depth of a ditch. 
 
 The exterior side of a parapet is formed with a slope which has 
 a base equal to its height, that being the inclination which (ordina- 
 ry) earth assumes when thrown up loosely ; and, therefore, it is the 
 most advantageous form for a mass of earth whose sides are unsup- 
 ported. 
 
 The interior slope of a parapet has a base not greater than one- 
 third or one-fourth of its height, in order to allow the men to ap- 
 proach near the crest, and to fire over the parapet with ease. 
 
 9. R Pi 1 1 A 
 
6 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 As newly Tnoved enrth will not remain at such a steep. slope with- 
 out support, it must be retained in that state by a revetment. 
 
 The KEVETMENT is commonlj made with gabions, fascines, sand- 
 bags, or sods of turf; or again with hurdles, casks, trunks of trees, 
 and occasionally with doors, shutters, &c., from any neighboring- 
 houses. Trunks of trees are objectionable as a revetment for the 
 interior slope, on account of the splinters that fly from them when 
 struck by shot; and large trees^ laid horizontally to revet the escarp 
 or counterscarp, are defective, because they serve as steps for the 
 assailants. 
 
 Gabions are strong cylindrical baskets without top or bottom, 2 
 feet in diameter, and 2 feet 9 inches in height. These are placed 
 in rows along the line of work at an inclination corresponding to 
 the required slope, and then filled with earth. To make a gabion, 
 from eight to fourteen pickets, S feet 6 inches long, are fixed up- 
 right in the ground, at equal distaHCcs, in the circumference of a 
 circle, 1 foot 11 inches in diameter; flexible twigs (or rods) are 
 then interwoven with the upright pickets, commencing with three 
 rods at the bottom, and weaving each in succession outside of two 
 pickets and inside of one; as the twigs (or rods) are expended, 
 others are added, and the basket work continued to the height of 2 
 feet 9 inches ; this work (which is called the web) is sewn in three or 
 four parts, from top to bottom ; withes, (called gads,) or spun-yarn 
 being used for that purpose, in order to keep it from coming off the 
 pickets; the ends of these are then cut off, about an inch from the 
 web. A gabion, thus made, stands 3 feet higla in the revetment, 
 and weighs from 36 to 40 lbs. The best wood for the web, and 
 particularly for the gads, is willow and hazel. 
 
 Fascines are military faggots, 18 feet long and 9 inches in 
 diameter : they can be sawed into shorter length, and are sometimes 
 made only G feet long. 
 
 To make a fascine, two trestles (like a St. Andrew's cross) are 
 fixed in the ground at 16 feet apart ^ then three or four other tres- 
 tles (according to the length and thickness of the brushwood) are 
 placed at equal distances between the two first trestles; and in a 
 direct line with them ; brushwood is next laid along the trestles, 
 (the smallest inside,) so as to project 17 or 18 inches beyond the 
 extreme trestles, and is compressed to a diameter of 9 inches by 
 means of an instrument called a choker;* the brushwood is bound 
 
 * Tlie choicer consists of 4 feet of chain, with a wooden lever at each 
 eiul. On the chain is marked, by rings a length of 28 inches, being a cir- 
 cumference equivalent, nearly, to a diameter of 9 inches. 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 7 
 
 with gads, (before the choker is relaxed,) at 6 inches beyond the 
 extreme trestles, and at intermediate intervals of 15 i inches, and 
 the ends of the fascine are sawed off square, at 1 foot beyond the 
 extreme trestles. 
 
 Fascine gads are tough and flexible twigs, 5 feet long, very 
 much twisted to render them lit for tying. A squad of five men 
 can, in an hour, make a fascine which weighs (when tolerably dry 
 material) from 140 to IGO lbs. If, however, the bruvshwood is green 
 and much thicker than a man's thumb, it will weigh 200 lbs. The 
 fascines forming a revetment are fastened in their position, (one 
 above another,) by picket^ 3^ or 4 feet long, which are driven 
 obliquely downwards through the fascine so as to form an angle cf 
 45° with the slope. The pickets should be in the proportion of 6 
 to an 18-inch fascine, of which two are driven vertically, in order 
 to fasten each fascine to that which is beneath it. 
 
 Two gabions make nearly the same quantity of revetment as an 
 18-inch fascine, and consume but half the quantity of materials j 
 moreover, they require only common laborers to form them into a 
 revetment, and stand in their positions without pickets or other 
 fastening; they also make a more durable revetment than fascines 
 or sand-bags. 
 
 As fascines are heavy, require pickets to fasten them, and expe- 
 rienced men to build them in revetment; as, moreover,. each fascine 
 takes twice as much material as two gabions, which, together, will 
 make a revetment of equal supcrfices, it is evident that fjiscines are 
 inferior to gabions for the formation of revetments, although they 
 support the earth at the same slope, viz., with a base equal to one- 
 quarter of its height. 
 
 Sang-bags are bags of coarse canvas, measuring, when empty 
 and laid flat, 2 feet 8 inches by 1 foot 4 inches; they contain, when 
 quite full, a bushel of earth ; but when tied and placed in revet- 
 ment, only three-quarters of a bushel. In building a revetment 
 with them they are arranged with their ends and sides presented al- 
 ternately to the front in each course, and with the joints in the suc- 
 cessive couises broken, like brickwork. Sixteen sand-bags build 10 
 square feet of revetment; they ought to be tarred, if the vevet-^, 
 ments are to last a considerable time ; if not tarred, they rot in two 
 months. An empty sand-bag weighs 1 lb. 2 oz., and when tarred 1 
 lb. 12 oz. 
 
 Filled sand-bags are musket-shot proof, and are frequently placed 
 on a parapet, one across two others, the latter being a short distance 
 asunder, in order that the intervals may serve as loopholes. 
 
8 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 Gun batteries are sometimes made entirely of sand-bags, which 
 are filled at a distance and brought to the place ; this may be done 
 either to save time, or when earth cannot be procured on the spot, 
 in consequence of the soil being rocky or marshy. 
 
 On naval expeditions sand-bags are very serviceable, as there is 
 no other way in which a battery can be promptly formed on a 
 shore. 
 
 When sand-bags or gabions are made use of to revet the cheeks 
 of embrasures, they should be covered with raw hides, to prevent 
 them from being damaged by the flash and the concussion caused 
 by the discharge of the gun. 
 
 Sods or turf, being generally procurable on the spot, are much 
 used in the revetments of the slopes of field works; but there are 
 strong objections to sod revetments, particularly as they take three 
 times as long to build as a brick wall. 
 
 Good sods ought to be cut 16 inches long, 8 inches wide, and 4 
 inches thick; they are built up in the same manner as bricks, and 
 with the grass downwards, and are fastened with pickets long 
 enough to penetrate three courses. Six sods build 2 square feet of 
 revetment. A sod revetment requires most labor; revetments of 
 sand-bags, fascines, and gabions, require successively less; the last 
 is the best in all respects; a sod revetment retains the earth at a 
 slope of one-third only, the three others at a slope of one-fourth. 
 
 The parapet is bounded on its upper surface by a plane called the 
 '^superior slope;" this declines towards the counterscarp, in order 
 to enable the defenders to see and fire on the assailants (directly) 
 until they descend into the ditch. The amount of this slope is 
 called the " plongee," and this varies from one-sixth to one-fourth of 
 the thickness of the parapet, but it must not exceed one-fourth in 
 order that the crest* of the parapet may not become too weak. 
 
 It is of great importance that the superior slope should be di- 
 rected to the counterscarp, as it then enables the defenders, not- 
 withstanding the smoke and confusion consequent on an attack, 
 to direct their fire with certainty to a spot where the assailants' col- 
 umns must be, more or less, detained by the ditch and the obstacles 
 in.it, 
 
 • If the superior slope cannot be directed to the edge of the coun- 
 
 * It has been found by experience that a soldier cannot depress his 
 musket, when firing, more than 15° below a horizontal plane, and a plon- 
 g^e of one-fourtli of the thickness of the parapet gives a depression of 
 15°; this is an additional reason for limiting the pIong6e to one-fourth of 
 the thickness of the parapet. 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 9 
 
 terscarp without making the plongee more than one-fourth of the 
 thickness of the parapet, the counterscarp must be raised by means 
 of a small glacis. The crest of this glacis, however, should be kept 
 at least 4 feet below the crest of the parapet of the work, that the 
 assailants, when on the glacis, may not have the power of firing into 
 the work. 
 
 The outer edge of the superior slope is called the "exterior 
 crest," whilst the inner (and upper) edge of the same slope is called 
 the "interior crest," or the "crest" of the parapet. 
 
 A step, called a "banquette," is placed at the foot of the interior 
 slope, and from 4 feet 3 inches to 4 feet 6 inches below the crest, 
 in order to enable the defenders to fire with ease over the parapet, 
 and in the direction of its superior slope. 
 
 The terreplein, or tread of the banquette, is made 8 feet 
 wide for one rank of men, and 4 feet wide if intended for two 
 ranks. In order that the men on it may descend backwards with 
 ease, there is a gentle* slope for that purpose, having a base equal 
 to t\^ice the height of the banquette. 
 
 The ditch is not excavated immediately at the foot of the exterior 
 slope of the parapet, but at a distance from it, varying from 1 to 4 
 feet, according to the adhesiveness of the soil. This space of un- 
 moved earth is called the berme, and it is requisite both to remove 
 the pressure of the parapet from the immediate edge of the ditch, 
 and to facilitate 'the construction and repair of the parapet. A 
 berme has the defect of afi"ording an intermediate landing-place on 
 which the assailants may form; and although it may be occupied 
 by obstacles, these require additional labor, and may be destroyed 
 by cannon; yet a berme can scarcely be dispensed with unless the 
 earth is very adhesive, and that the parapet is not more than 8 feet 
 
 'The berme, in most cases, may be cut away after the parapet has 
 had two or three days to settle. 
 
 The ditch will not be an eff'ective obstacle if less than 6 feet m 
 depth, and for the reason given, it is not made deeper than 12 feet. 
 
 The sides of the ditch being of unmoved earth, they will support 
 themselves, without revetment, at a steeper slope than those of the 
 parapet; and as the counterscarp has not the weight of the parapet to 
 resist, and is not exposed to fire, it may, generally, be made steeper 
 than the escarp. 
 
 ^ If the parapet has a greater command than 8 feet, this convenience 
 is rehnquished on account of the great space occupied by it, and the ban- 
 (juette is ascended by steps. 
 
10 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 The slopes of both vary from a base equal to the height to a base 
 of one-quarter of the height. 
 
 To find the breadth of the ditch, (of the usifal shape,) divide the 
 area of a profile of the parapet by the intended* depth of the ditch, 
 and the quotient is the mean breadth of the latter; to this, add half 
 the sum of the bases of the escarp and counterscarp slopes for the 
 breadth at top, and deduct the same half sum for the breadth at 
 bottom. 
 
 The best shape for an unflanked ditch is one having a triangular 
 section, as it does not permit the assailants to form at the bottom; 
 and moreover, with an equal depth and area of section, it may be 
 made wider at top than a trapezoid would be; by which means the 
 superior slope of the parapet can be directed to the counterscarp 
 without too much increasing the plongee, or without raising the 
 counterscarp by a glacis. 
 
 To find the breadth of a ditch having a triangular section, divide 
 the area of a profile of the parapet by half the given depth of 
 ditch, and the quotient is the required breadth at top ; the sides 
 may evidently have any given inclinations to the horizon consistently 
 with the given breadth, depth, and area of a transverse section. 
 
 THE OUTLINES OF FIELD WORKS. 
 
 The direction which a parapet is made to assume in order to en- 
 close, or partially enclose, the ground to be fortified, is called the 
 outline of a work. 
 
 The following are general principles to be observed in determin- 
 ing the outlines of field works : 
 
 1st. There should be a reciprocal defence between all the parts of 
 works, so that the ground over which an enemy must pass to the 
 attack should, if possible, be seen both in front and in flank. 
 
 2dly. The "lines of defence'^ must not exceed the eff"ective range 
 of muskets, viz. : about 160 yards. 
 
 3dly. Re-entering"]" angles (viz. : flanking angles,) ought-never to 
 be less than 90° and seldom more than 100° ; for, if less than 90°, 
 the men on the flanking parts would fire against each other; and if 
 more than 100°, the fire of the flanking parts would diverge too far 
 from the salient to be flanked. 
 
 * This is determined chiefly by the natnre of the soil and the size of 
 the parapet. 
 
 "I" In both these cases it is presumed that the soldier fiies (as he gene- 
 rally does) at right angles to the parapet behind which he stands. 
 
Page 10. 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 11 
 
 4thly. The salient angles of works should be as obtuse as possi- 
 ble, and never less than 60°, otherwise the interior space might be- 
 come too contracted; the angle would be so sharp as to be quickly 
 worn away by the weather, and would be easily battered down; also 
 the* undefended sectoral space in front of the salient angle (which 
 is the supplement of the angel) would become very great; and 
 
 5thly. The outline of a field work should be proportioned in 
 length to the number of men and guns intended for its defence. 
 One man occupies a space of three feet. 
 
 The names of the works most commonly employed in field forti- 
 fication are redans, single, double, and triple; redans with auxiliary 
 flanks; lunettes, redoubts, star forts, bastioned and demi-bastioned 
 forts, block-houses, and works used mostly for lines of intrench- 
 ment, such as tenaillcs and cremailleres. 
 
 The REDAN is a work consisting of two faces, which form with 
 each other a salient angle, the rear being open. When the faces 
 are not more than about 20 yards in length, the work is sometimes 
 called a fleche. 
 
 The redan is in the most advantageous position when the ground 
 before the salient angle, and approaches to the gorge, are inaccessi- 
 ble, or when the work can be supported by troops; for example, 
 when, with obstacles in its front, it is employed as an advanced 
 work to defend hollow ground which cannot be seen from the prin- 
 cipal work — to protect a bridge, a dam, a road, a defile, or to cover 
 a guard, an advanced post, &c. 
 
 The weak points of this work are : that it has an open gorge, and 
 that its ditch, and the ground in front of the salLent angle, are un- 
 defended either by direct or flanking fire. 
 
 On account of its having an open gorge, it is seldom advisable to 
 construct a redan as an isolated work; its rear should be exposed to 
 the fire of some collateral work, or have free communication with a 
 body of troops in its rear, to whom it may form an advanced post, 
 or outwork; or otherwise the faces should terminate on a river, a 
 marsh, or any inaccessible ground, which would prevent it from be- 
 ing turned. 
 
 The first defect, viz, : that of having an open gorge, may be reme- 
 died in a sHght degree by placing along the gorge abatis, trous de 
 
 * Undefended by direct fire. To prevent the enemy from approaching 
 the work on these undefended sectors the salients shouhl be directed to- 
 wards some natural obstacle, such as a marsh, &c.; or if this cannot be 
 done, then artificial obstacles should be disposetl in their front. 
 
12 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS, 
 
 loup, &c., (or palisades, if time and materials abound;) as for the 
 second defect, a direct fire may be brought in front of the salient 
 either by rounding the latter, or by cutting off the angle by a short 
 face not less than 6 yards long. 
 
 A flanking fire may be procured for the ditch and salients, by 
 forming auxiliary flanks, which may be placed either towards the 
 middle or at the extremities of the faces; such a flank ought not to 
 be less than than 12 yards long, that there may be, at least, 12 men 
 firing from it. 
 
 Double redans consist of two redans joined together, their ex- 
 terior faces being generally longer than the others: the French call 
 a work of this kind a queue d' hyronde. 
 
 A TRIPLE REDAN consists of three redans joined together, the 
 exterior faces of these are also, in general, longer than the others. 
 
 A LUNETTE is a large redan with flanks parallel or nearly parallel 
 to the capital; as a general rule, the flanks are traced perpendicu- 
 larly to the intended line of fire, for the purpose of bringing on 
 certain spots a more direct fire than could be made from the faces 
 of the work. 
 
 It is often desirable to secure the gorges of these works against 
 surprise; this may be done by disposing across the gorge a single or 
 double row of palisades, or a stockade-work, in the form of a front 
 fortification or of a tenaille : there should be a banquette to it, that 
 the defenders may have a command over the* assailants, and a ditch 
 to prevent the enemy from getting close, and cutting, burning, or 
 blowing down the obstacle. Trous de loup, abatis, and chevaux-de- 
 frise are sometimes disposed across the gorge for the same purpose. 
 
 A REDOUBT is a closed work, the parapet of which does not form 
 re-entering angles; it may be quadrilateral, polygonal, or circular. 
 
 Circular redoubts, although they have no undefended sectors, and 
 enclose a greater space than any other redoubt with an equal length 
 of parapet, are seldom formed on account of the difficulty of their 
 construction, and also because their ditches are incapable of any 
 flanking defence; the lines of flre diverging from the parapet, any 
 one spot on the ground is very imperfectly defended. 
 
 A four-sided figure is the best and most usual form for a redoubt, 
 because it is of simple construction; the ditches are more easily 
 flanked, and there are not so many points of attack as in a redoubt 
 of a greater number of angles. Redoubts, being closed works, are 
 better calculated to stand detached than redans or lunettes, and are, 
 therefore, constructed when a small work is required without any 
 immediate protection from the gorge — the armed party being strong 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 13 
 
 enough to complete and man a four-sided redoubt, eacli side of 
 which is not less than 15 yards long. 
 
 The size depends on the number of men who are to garrison -it, 
 and upon the number of guns which it is to contain; also upon the 
 length of time during which it is to be occupied: this may be for a 
 few hours only, (as on a field of battle,) or for a period of weeks or 
 months. 
 
 If wanted only for a few hours, it will be sufficient to allow 3 feet 
 in length of parapet for every man of the detachment; or for every 
 two men, if they are to be formed in double rank. If guns are to 
 be placed in the work, 15 feet of parapet must be given to each, in 
 order that the gunners may have sufficient room on each side to 
 work it. 
 
 But when the redoubt is destined to contain a body of men for a 
 constderable length of time, it becomes necessary to have room for 
 them to lie down within the banquette with their arms and packs; 
 supposing one-third to be on guard, patrolling, &c., two square yards, 
 in addition to the slope of the banquette, are sufficient for each 
 man, and 36 square yards for each gun with its appointments. 
 
 The rule, consequently, for a square redoubt is: to multiply the 
 given number of men by 2, and number of guns by 36, for the 
 numbei' of square yards which the work ought to contain within the 
 foot of its banquette, the square root of the product will be the 
 length in yards of the side of the square forming that area; adding 
 to this result the breadth of two interior slopes, and of 2 banquettes 
 with their slopes, (about 7 yards altogether,) we shall have the side 
 of the square formed by the crest of the parapet. 
 
 A square redoubt ought not to be traced with less extent of side 
 than 15 yards; for, by employing the calculation explained above, 
 it will be found that such a work is only just sufficient to contain 
 the men necessary for its defence : on the other hand, it is unusual 
 to make a square redoubt with a longer side than 40 yards, because 
 it would require a garrison more suitable to u work of a stronger 
 outline. 
 
 The imperfections of redoubts are, that they are entirely without 
 a flanking fire for the defence of the ground in front of their faces, 
 also that their ditches and the sectoral spaces before the angles are 
 without any fire whatever for their defence. 
 
 A flanking defence for the ditches may be obtained by placing 
 palisade or stockade caponnieres in them, either at the angles or in 
 the middle of the faces; by tambours in a like position, or by loop- 
 holed galleries under the counterscarp at the salients of the work. 
 
14 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 The want of a fire in the directions of the capitals may be reme- 
 died, as in the redan, by cutting off an angle by a short face, by 
 making it curved, or by tracing a portion of the line of parapet en 
 cremailUre; viz, : by disposing it in a succession of salient and re- 
 entering angles, the sides of which are alternately parallel to the 
 capital : this construction is, however, very difficult, and causes in- 
 convenient variations in the thickness and height of the parapet. 
 
 A ditch caponniere is an oblong structure formed with palisades, 
 or with stockade work, loop-holed, and roofed over with planks and 
 earth to secure^ the men from the effects of shell, and a plunging 
 fire from the counterscarp. It ought, if possible, to be flanked with 
 musketry, to prevent an enemy from closing on it, and getting un- 
 der cover. 
 
 The best position for a caponniere in the ditch of a redoubt is at 
 the salient angle, as then one caponniere flanks two branches of the 
 ditch. It should be separated from the counterscarp by an enlarge- 
 ment of the ditch, to prevent an enemy from using it as a bridge to 
 cross the ditch, and it ought to have a wicket to allow of sallies into 
 the ditch. 
 
 The bottom or sole of the caponniere may, sometimes with advan- 
 tage, be sunk 3 or 4 feet below the bottom of the ditch, in order 
 that the fire from the loopholes may graze along it, and prevent an 
 enemy from closing on them; by this construction; and by making 
 the roof convex, it becomes more difficult for him to use the capon- 
 niere as a bridge to pass the ditch. 
 
 To lessen the destructive eff'ect of shell, traverses should be placed 
 in all closed works when those missiles are likely to be employed 
 against them. 
 
 From the interior to the exterior of closed works there must be a 
 passage through the parapet, protected by a traverse or by stockade 
 work, and the traverse should extend far enough on each side of 
 the passage to intercept shot which might enter it obliquely. The 
 ditch is crossed by a bridge which is conveniently formed of loose 
 planks and beams, because, in case of attack, they can be quickly 
 taken up and used to barricade the passage. When the ditch is 
 more than twelve feet wide, a trestle must be placed in the middle 
 to support the beams or sleepers. 
 
 When rough timber only can be procured, stout straight limbs of 
 trees must be. selected for the sleepers, which may be covered with 
 strong hurdles, (or brushwood,) over which a layer of sods and then 
 a small quantity of gravel may be laid. 
 
 A STAR FORT is a closed work, the parapet of which forms seve- 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 15 
 
 ral acute salient angles and obtuse re-entering angles, giving it a 
 form like the usual representation of a star. 
 
 It has been seen that redoubts are defended only by direct fire, 
 and that without some contrivance for affording flanking fire, the 
 sectors at the salients, as well as the ditches, are absolutely unde- 
 fended. Star forts, consisting of re-entering as well as salient an- 
 gles, are intended to obviate that defect in some degree. They may 
 be constructed either upon an exterior or interior polygon. [f 
 ground is to be fortified which does not admit the possibility of work- 
 ing outwards, as an island for instance, a polygon is traced to suit 
 the form of the ground; the sides of the polygon are bisected by 
 perpendiculars drawn inwards, and the fac3s of the star fort are 
 drawn from the angles of the polygon to the inner extremities of 
 the perpendiculars: this is called fortifying upon the exterior poly- 
 gon. 
 
 The length of the perpendicular* in a square, pentagon, hexa- 
 gon, and octagon, should be respectively one-eighth, one-fifth, 
 one-fourth, and one-third of the side, in order that the flank- 
 ing angles may approach as near as possible to right angles, without 
 making the salient angles less than 60°. "When the polygon is ir- 
 regular, the length of the perpendiculars must be determined by 
 the an<z:les nearest to them. 
 
 Again, it may be required to surround a building witl\,a star fort 
 in such a position that the work could not be traced inwards • then, 
 a polygon surrounding the building must be laid down, and on each 
 of its' sides an equilateral triangle must be formed towards the ex- 
 terior. 
 
 If this construction be applied to a dodecagon, it will be found 
 that the re-entering angles are exactly right angles; in an octa- 
 eonal fort the re-enterino; or flankinq; an";les are each equal to. 
 105°. _ 
 
 The necessity for employing a polygon superior to an octagon will 
 rarely occur ; yet with irregular figures it may happen that some of 
 the angles, are equal, or nearly so, to those of regular polygons of 
 more than twelve sides. 
 
 It is necessary to fix some limit as a minimum to the length of 
 face for these works; this depends on the distance at which a shot 
 fired from the parapet of a face would reach the level of the • 
 ground; for it is evident that if the face be made less than that dis- 
 
 * The lengths given are merely approximations in the form of the near- 
 est simple fraction of the side. 
 
16 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 tance, the enemy, arrived at the rounding of the counterscarp, will 
 be more or less secure from the fire of the adjoining face. If we 
 suppose a man to fire along the superior slope of a parapet with a 
 plongee of one-sixth, and that the work has a command of seven 
 and a half feet, we have by similar triangles, 
 
 1 : 6 : : 7i (the command) : 45; 
 
 the distance, in feet, at which the shot would reach the level of the 
 ground. 
 
 The face should, therefore, not be less than 45 feet, viz., 15 
 yards. If the bottom of the ditch on any face is to be defended 
 by the fire of the next face, a still greater length is required: to 
 find this, we have the proportion 1:6:: the relief (the height of 
 the crest of the parapet above the bottom of the ditch) : the dis- 
 tance at which a shot would reach the bottom of the ditch; this 
 distance is 30 yards when the command of the work and depth of 
 its ditch are both seven and a half feet. The length of the faces 
 depends also upon the number of guns to be placed behind the 
 parapet, and upon the strength of the garrison; but 35 yards may 
 be considered as the greatest length of face, for the troops required 
 to defend a star fort having a longer face would be sufficient to con- 
 struct and defend a fort of a better tracing. 
 
 The construction of star forts is attended with some trouble, par- 
 ticularly if the ground is uneven : such works present at their acute 
 salient angels numerous points of attack: the faces and sahents are 
 without flanking defence when the polygon is inferior to an octagon, 
 and even in this case such defence is imperfect; the ditches are un- 
 defended, unless the faces are made unreasonably long; the line of 
 parapet to be manned is very great, when compared with the inte- 
 rior space, and is exposed to be enfiladed in all directions. 
 
 CONSTRUCTIONS. 
 
 The following are convenient methods of tracing on the ground 
 the most useful polygonal redoubts and star forts: 
 
 For a pentagonal redouht : on a base equal to one fifth of the 
 perimeter, or length of the parapet, form an isosceles triangle, of 
 which each of the equal sides is one-third of the perimeter, and on 
 each side of this triangle as a base form another isosceles triangle 
 with its (equal) side, each equal to the side of the pentagon, or first 
 base. 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS* 17 
 
 For a hexagonal redoubt : trace an equilateral triangle, the side 
 of which is in length three times that of the redoubt; trisect each 
 side, and join the nearest outer extremities of the centre portions : 
 these lines, with those which join their extremities, will constitute 
 the hexagonal redoubt required. 
 
 For a hexagonal star fort: trace an equilateral -triangle on a 
 base equal to one-fourth of the whole length of the parapet; trisect 
 each side, and form equilateral triangles on the three centre por- 
 tions. These will complete the figure. 
 
 For an octagonal redoubt: trace a square on aside equal to 
 three-tenths of the whole length of parapet of the redoubt ; and 
 from the angles of the square measure on each side half the diago- 
 nal; the points being joined, the magistral line is traced. 
 . For an octagonal star fort: trace a square on a base equal to 
 three-twentieths of the whole length of the parapet of the star fort; 
 with this square form an octagon as before, and on each of its sides 
 trace an equilateral triangle. 
 
 Forts with bastions are the most perfect of closed field works, 
 as it is evident that they possess all the advantages of mutual de- 
 fence afforded by the corresponding works in permanent fortifica- 
 tions; they are traced similarly to these last, although rarely on a 
 polygon superior to a pentagon; as, however, their defence mainly 
 depends on the fire of common muskets, their lines of defence must 
 not exceed the efi'ective range of such arms, or about 160 yards, 
 and therefore the side of the polygon on which they are constructed 
 must not exceed 200 yards in length. 
 
 On the other hand, the side of the polygon should not be less 
 than 120 yards in length; since, if it were so, the bastions would 
 be too small, and the flanks and curtain too short for the defence re- 
 quired from them. 
 
 Bastioned forts should have within them a good reduit, in order 
 to give confidence to the garrison, and secure its retreat: such a re- 
 duit should have a command of four or five feet over every part of 
 the main work, in order that the enemy, having gained the parapet 
 of the latter, may not fire from thence into the reduit. 
 
 The reduit may either conform to the outline of the fort, or it 
 may be a simple redoubt, a blockhouse, or a tower of brick or stone, 
 so traced that the defenders may fire into the bastions of the fort, 
 these being the points at which an enerfty is most likely to force an 
 entrance. 
 
 As "bastioned forts require a strong garrison, they are constructed 
 when it is intended to occupy a point of importance for a conside- 
 
18 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 rable time, and, tlierefore, the reduit often forms^ at the same time, 
 the barrack of the o;arrison. 
 
 In order to throw an additional fire towards the direction of the 
 sahents, the curtain is sometimes broken in the prolongation of the 
 lines of defence; but in order that some fire may be directed imme- 
 diately in front, a portion may be formed in a line parallel to the 
 original curtain, and equal to about one-third of its length- the 
 two brisures should form with each other a re-entering rather than 
 a salient angle, in order that tliere may be no dead spaces in the 
 ditch. 
 
 The counterscarp of the ditch may be di\awn either to the shoulder 
 angles of the bastions, as in permanent fortification, or parallel to 
 the faces, flanks, and curtain; the latter method is generally prefer- 
 able, as it saves time and labor; in this case, however, the counter- 
 scarp of one flank would conceal the ditch of the nearest face from 
 the fire of the opposite flank; this counterscarp ought, therefore, in 
 part, to be cut away in an inclined plane, or ramp, parallel to, or 
 coincidina; with, the line of fire from that flank. 
 
 CD ^ • 
 
 Demi-bastioned forts, like those with bastionss, are traced by 
 letting fall a perpendicular from the middle of each exterior side, 
 and drawing lines of defence; but each front has only one flank, 
 every alternate face extending from the angle of Ihe polygon to 
 the inner extremity of that flank, and coinciding with the line of 
 defence throughout its entire length; such works have the defect of 
 aff'ording a regular flanking defence only to every alternate face; as 
 the short face of each front receives a very oblique and imperfect 
 flanking defence from the collateral long face. 
 
 Loopholes are narrow rectangular openings made in walls of 
 masonry or wood, through which to direct a fire of musketry. In 
 walls of two feet or two and a half feet thiok they are about nine 
 inches high by fifteen inches wide on the inside, and twenty inches 
 high by four inches wide on the outside. In timber six or eight 
 inches thick they are eight inches wide inside and three inches out- 
 side, the height being twelve inches. 
 
 They are' made wider on the inside than on the outside, because, 
 thus formed, they afford better cover for the men behind them; 
 they are placed at not less than three feet asunder, that the wall 
 may not be too much weake'ned, and that the men firing through 
 them may not be crowded; they are made from four feet t9 four 
 and a quarter feet above the. banquette or ground on which the men 
 stand to fire through them. 
 
y* 
 
 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 19 
 
 Stockade 'w6Rk is a wall composed of trunks of trees, or 
 rout;h pieces of timber placed upright in the ground; they are 
 made to touch each other, and loopholes are cut through them; if 
 composed of tre«s, they ought to be squared, that the parts in con- 
 tact may be of the same thickness as the rest of the "wall. 
 
 A TAMBOUR is an enclosure of palisadts or stockade work, some- 
 times with a ditch and banquette, and of any form that may be ne- 
 cessary to afford the defence required. 
 
 Blockhouses are covered field worl s, generally rectangular; 
 the walls are formed of trunks of trees, a:id above the timbers of 
 the roof there is, usually, a bed of earth, Aree or four feet thick. 
 
 In mountainous and well-wooded coui tries blockhouses are the 
 best description of 'field works, because ihe enemy cannot easily 
 bring cannon to destroy them. It is verj difiicult in mountainous 
 countries to find ground where works ma} be constructed free from 
 the defect of being commanded, and cons iquently open works are 
 there comparatively useless. 
 
 Blockhouses are of great advantage as . eduits in situations where 
 it is difficult to defilade the interiors of works from commanding 
 heights, more especially since they may serve as barracks for the 
 troops; in such a case the b'edsteads, arr mged on each side, are 
 used as banquettes, and the loopholes a -e made four feet above 
 them. 
 
 A blockhouse to resist musketry shou d be composed of trees, 
 squared so that the parts in contact may 1 e at least six inches thick, 
 that being the depth to which a musket ball will penetrate in fir. 
 In order to resist artillery, two rows of ti ees (or -of stockades) are 
 placed vertically in the ground, with an interval between them from 
 three to six feet wide, which is filled with earth well rammed. The 
 trees or logs should be eleven or twelve feet long, so that they may 
 be planted at least three feet in the ground, and allow the interior 
 of the blockhouse to be eight or nine fSot high; it should also be 
 from eighteen to twenty-four feet wide in the interior. 
 
 The earth used to render the covering ^ hell-proof may be shaped 
 like a small parapet, and from this an additional fire(of musketr3'^)may 
 be obtained; the access to this upper parapet is through a trap-door 
 in the roof To prevent the blockhouse from being set on fire, a 
 ditch should be dug round it, leaving a berme of eight or ten feet, 
 and on this the earth is piled up against the wood as high as the 
 loopholes. 
 
 Sometimes blockhouses are constructed in the form of a cross, 
 when the flanking fire thus obtained on their faces renders them 
 
20 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 much more powerful; they are also, occasionally, built with an up- 
 per story, the angles of which should project over the sides of the 
 lower story; the foot of the lower walls may thus be defended by 
 the fire from above. 
 
 An ordinary dwelling-house, with thick masonry walls, may be 
 formed into a blockhouse by pulling down the upper stories, and 
 heaping a mass of materials, three or four feet in thickness, over 
 the ceiling of the lower rooms; earth or rubbish should also be 
 placed about the house as high as the loopholes. 
 
 DEFILADING OF FIELD WORKS. 
 
 To DEFILADE a work from a height is so to regulate the direction 
 and elevation of the parapets or covering masses, that its interior 
 may be screened from the view of an enemy on the heights. 
 
 A PLANE OF SIGHT is an imaginary plane supposed to pass 
 through the summit of the height from which the work is to be de- 
 filaded, and the terreplein of the work. 
 
 A PLANE OF DEFILADE is a plane supposed to pass through the 
 crest of the parapet of the work parallel to the plane of sight. 
 
 In many situations it is practicable (and then it is the easier 
 method) to defilade the i.ices or longest branches of a work by 
 the tracing; viz., by directing them on marshes, rivers, lakes, pre- 
 cipices, hollows, &c., where batteries cannot be erected, or at worst, 
 on points of the height not nearer than 8U0* yards to the work. 
 Also the choice of the outline of the work should be attended to ; 
 for among the dilFcrent tracings by which the same object may be 
 attained, some will be more easy to defilade than others. 
 
 When a work is thrown up in front of a height, it is the more 
 difl&cult to defilade in proportion to its depth; it should, therefore, 
 have an oblong form, and its longest faces should be traced parallel 
 to the hieght. If, for instance, the work were a rectangular redoubt, 
 the long faces should be traced parallel to the height, and the short 
 ones be directed on it. 
 
 An open work will be defiladed when the plane of defilement 
 passes through a line 8 feet above the ground at its gorge, and at a 
 
 * ArtJUeiy on a heigl)t, even of 120 feet, at 800 yards distance from a 
 work, has no more advantage, in respect of a plunging fire, than if it were 
 on a level witlr the rock ; for in both cases it mi\st be elevated about 1^ 
 degree to attain this range. 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. ' 21 
 
 point 4 or 8* feet above the commanding hill, according as the 
 work is to be defiladed against artillery or musketry. 
 
 It is usual to defilade a work against musketry if there are 
 heights within 300 yards of it, and against artillery, when the 
 heights are not farther distant than 800 yards. 
 
 When the commanding ground is not occupied by the enemy, 
 the work may be defiladed in the following manner : stretch a rope 
 between two poles planted in the line of the gorge at 8 feet above 
 the ground ; direct visual rays from various points of this rope to 
 the top of a pole placed on the commanding hill, and 4 feet high if 
 the work is to be defiladed against artillery, but 8 feet if it is to be 
 defiladed against musketry; the intersection of the rays with poles 
 planted on the tracing of the intended parapet, will indicate the 
 height to which the parapet must be raised in order that its defend- 
 ers may be situated under the plane of defilade; and since these 
 visual rays represent lines of fire from the enemy's position on the 
 hill, it will be evident that a parapet whose height is thus deter- 
 mined will defilade the interior of the work. 
 
 When it is impossible to place the pole on the commanding 
 ground, the following method must be adopted : along the gorge of 
 the intended work stretch a rope, which is to be 4 feet above the 
 ground if the work is to be defiladed against artillery, and 1^ feet 
 if against musketry; in rear of this rope at any convenient distance 
 (about 5 yards) drive two pickets into the ground, and upon them 
 raise or lower a cord or a straight edge of wood, until it is in the 
 same plane with the rope at the gorge, and the top of the height 
 from which the work is to be defiladed; then look from the rear 
 cord or straight edge along that at the gorge, and observe where 
 the line of sight from thence cuts the poles raised on the tracing of 
 the intended parapet; these points of section (indicating the position 
 of the plane of sight) may be marked by one of the party ; lastly, 
 make the crest of the parapet 4 feet higher than the points thus 
 found if the work is to be defiladed against cannon, but 6j feet 
 higher if against musketry. 
 
 If it is found that, by this process, the parapet must have more 
 than 12 feet command in order to defilade the work; the parapet 
 must be raised to any convenient height, ^suppose 10 or 12 feet,) 
 and then, in order to defilade the part which is not protected by 
 
 *A field-gun stands about 3^ feet above tlie gioinid, and a man on 
 horseback can fire about 7^ feet above the ground ; therefore 4 and S are 
 taken as the nearest whole numbers to these commands respectively. 
 
22 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 the parapet, a traverse must be erected, or the terreplein of the un- 
 protected part must be lowered, or both of these steps must be taken 
 conjointly. 
 
 In defilading a tete de pont, the plane of defilade should pass 
 8 feet above that part of the bridge which is most remote from the 
 height. 
 
 To defilade a closed work, (or one with a parapet both on the side 
 nearest to and on the f^ide furthest from the height,) unless the 
 crests on both sides are in a plane passing 8 feet above the ground 
 which the enemy may occupy, in front and in rear, a parados to 
 cover the defenders on the banquette of the side nearest to the 
 height from reverse fire, is indispensable; for it is clear that thq 
 higher the parapet nearest to a commanding ground is raised in or- 
 der to defilade a portion of the whole of the interior of tl»e work, 
 the more will the defenders standing on the banquette of that para- 
 pet be elevated above t.\e plane of defilement of the parapet fur- 
 thest from the height, (or the lower one;) they will, consequently, 
 become exposed to a reverse fire directed over the lower parapet. 
 
 In this case, therefore, make the parapet nearest to the command- 
 ing ground as high as convenient, and so as to defilade a portion (sup- 
 pose one-half) of the interior : at the extremity of this defiladed por- 
 tion, and (about) paraliel to the parapet, raise a parados high 
 enough to intercept visua rays directed from points 8 feet above the 
 banquette of the lower p; rapet t(^4 or 8 feet above the height, and 
 from points 8 feet above the banquette of the higher parapet to 
 points 8 feet above the gi ound in front of the former parapet. 
 
 If the site of the inte ided redoubt be commanded on opposite 
 sides, the work will be defiladed in the manner just described, ex- 
 cepting that, in this case, both the parapets being commanded, each 
 must be raised high eno igh to cover the portion of the work be- 
 tween it and the traverse or parados from the opposite height. 
 
 Or the work may be defiladed thus: the magistral line having 
 been traced, let the engineer place himself at any convenient part 
 of the interior with his eye 8 feet from the ground, and let a man 
 hold up a measuring rod on the tracing line between the engineer 
 and each hill ; then a visual ray, from a point estimated to be 8 feet 
 above each hill, will intersect the measuring rods in points through 
 which the crests of the parapets should pass. The place of the en- 
 gineer is the place of the traverse or parados, the height of which 
 is determined, as before, by visual rays crossing each other from 
 points 4 or 8 feet above, the opposite heights to points 8 feet above 
 the banquettes uiost distant from the heights. 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 23 
 
 With the aid of a plane table, the plane of sight may be readily 
 determined thus: let the upper surface of the table (which should 
 be near the surface of the ground in rear of the work) be placed in 
 a plane touching the points of command : the intersections of that 
 surface prolonged, with the poles planted at the angles of the work, 
 will determine as many points in the plane of site. 
 
 PROFILING. 
 
 The proper height of parapet for the work having been deter- 
 mined, (by the process of defilading, if necessary,) the next step is 
 to plant pickets on the faces, flanks, and angles as guides to the 
 workmen in giving it the suitable dimensions and form. Thus, to 
 the magistral line of each face and flank, trace on the ground per- 
 pendicularly at intervals, and on these measure, horizontally, the 
 bases of the slopes composing the profile to be employed. At the 
 points thus set out* fix poles or laths perpendicularly in the ground, 
 and saw ofi" their tops at the height which the parapet is to have at 
 that particular part; nail laths to the tops ot these poles from one to 
 the other across the direction of the intended parapet; and thus 
 there will be obtained an outline of the slopes, or a profile of the 
 parapet. 
 
 For the profile at an angle, lay a rope on the ground bisecting 
 that angle, and produce it outwards 3 drive pickets along this rope 
 at the points where it is intersected by the prolongations of lines 
 joining the bases of the profiles already set up perpendicularly to 
 the adjoining faces ; these pickets mark 1 he bases of the profiles at 
 the salient ; the laths may then be set up is before. 
 
 When the salient angle is 60°, the bieadth of the base of any 
 slope measured on the capital will be equal to twice the breadth of 
 the same slope taken on a line at right angles to the face. 
 
 DISTRIBUTION OF THE WORKING PARTY. 
 
 Divide the men into 6 equal parts, 3 of which are to be provided 
 with pickaxes and shovels, 2 are to have shovels only, and the re- 
 mainder are to be furnished with rammen^ only. 
 
 The party is then to be marched to the ground, and the men, 
 
 *Tlio best method of fixing the perpendic dar laths is to drive strong 
 pickets into the ground at the requited poi its, and to nail to them the 
 laths, previously cut of the proper length. 
 
24 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 having bpth pickaxes and shovels, (viz. the diggers,) are to be sta- 
 tioned 6 * feet apart on the ground where the ditch is to be dug 
 along the berme line, and facing the work. 
 
 The excavation of the ditch is now begun, the men first loosening 
 the earth with their pickaxes, and then shovelling it to the place 
 where the parapet is to stand ; here the rest of the party are posted, 
 and as the earth is thrown up to them, the men with shovels spread 
 it in layers, while the remainder with their rammers, beat it down 
 to a firm mass ; and as the parapet is raised they give it the form 
 indicated by the profiles. 
 
 The profiles may be made of 3 inch plank, ripped up into laths 
 three-quarters of an inch thick. 
 
 The work may be drained, if requisite, with fascines of stout 
 rods, or with loose stones having brushwood or heather laid over 
 them ; these are placed in trenches dug across the ground on which 
 the parapet is to be raised. 
 
 In excavating ditches and trenches, the slopes are made after the 
 ditch or trench is finished, the sides being at first left in steps ; the 
 crest of the slope is marked out, and then small sections are cut, 
 here and there, according to the proper form of the finished profile : 
 finally, the intermediate earth is cut away between these small sec- 
 tions; the latter answering the purpose of ensuring regularity in the 
 excavation of the ditch, as the lath profiles ensure it in the erection 
 of the parapet. 
 
 When near the surface, in soil requiring but little the use of the 
 pickaxe, an excavation of 6 cubic yards in a day of 8 hours would 
 be a fair task for a soldier, who, in general, is little accustomed to 
 the use of the pickaxe and shovel. 
 
 In calculating the time required to throw up a field work, the 
 following data may be assumed ; in light, dry sandy soil, that can 
 be easily dug without the aid of a pickaxe, a man can, in a day of 
 8 hours, load from 19 to 20 cubic yards of earth on barrows. If a 
 pickaxe be required, two men can do the same quantity of work. 
 
 If the whole mass must be first moved with the pickaxe, three or 
 four men should be allowed. 
 
 A man can wheel 20 cubic yards of earth per day to a distance of 
 30 yards on level ground, or 20 yards on a ramp. 
 
 Twenty cubic yards of earth will fill 500 wheelbarrows. 
 
 * The diggers must not be placed nearer to each other than 4^ feet; but 
 if the party is strong, another row of diggers may be employed at the 
 counterscarp, with their backs to the work; these throw the earth towards 
 the middle of the space marked out for tlie breadth of the ditch. 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. _ 25 
 
 A horse can do as much work as 7 men : he can carry 300 lbs. 20 
 miles per da}^ or 200 lbs. 30 miles; he can draw 1,600 lbs. on a 
 plain, and from 1,200 to 1,300 lbs. on irregular ground, when the 
 roads are in good order. 
 
 OBSTACLES. 
 
 Palisades are triangular prisms of wood pointed at the upper 
 end, and placed upright in the ground at 3 or 4 inches asunder; 
 they are about 10 feet long, with faces G or 8 inches wide, and are 
 sunk 3 or 4 feet in the ground. A trench of that depth is dug, 
 the pali^^ades are placed in it, and the earth is well rammed about 
 them ; they are connected at top (and sometimes at bottom also) by 
 a ribbon of wood, called a lintel, 4 inches wide by 2^ thick, nailed 
 to the inside of the palisades about one foot from the points; they 
 ought to stand, at least, 7 feet out of the ground. Rough palisades 
 may be formed, quickly, from trees by cutting them into lengths 
 about 10 feet, then describing triangles, with sides of not less than 
 6 inches in length on the ends, and sawing them lengthwise through 
 those sides; if thetrees are 12 or 14 inches in diameter, six equila- 
 teral triangles meeting in the centre, can be described on the ends, 
 and six palisades made of one piece : if the tree is but 6 inches in 
 diameter, then, by sawing it in halves, two palisades can be made 
 of one piece. 
 
 Palisades are only used in the ditches, and to close the gorges of 
 field works, and are not, as in permanent works, placed on the ban- 
 quettes; when in the ditch, their best position is at the foot of the 
 counterscarp, and slightly inclined towards it; for, thus placed, they 
 are more secure from a direct fire of artillery, and they detain the 
 enemy at the counterscarp under the deadly aim of the garrison; 
 also it makes it difficult for the assailants to. cut them down, there 
 being no room between them and the counterscarp to stand and 
 wield the axe. 
 
 Fraises are palisades about 11 feet long, placed in a horizontal or 
 in an inclined position ; they ought to be sunk about 5 feet in the 
 ground, the buried ends being joined by a ribbon in order to render 
 it difficult to pull them out; the pointed ends ought to be not less 
 than 7 feet from the bottom of the ditch; and when placed on the 
 berme they ought to incline downwards, in order that they may not 
 interrupt the passage of shells when rolled over the parapet. Fraises 
 are most advantageously placed 2 or 3 feet below the edge of the 
 counterscarp, as they are, there, more secure than on the berme, 
 2 
 
26 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 from the direct fire of the enemy, whom they detain under a close 
 fire from the work. 
 
 Chevaux-de-frise are beams of wood from 6 to 10 feet long, which 
 are cut in a square or hexagonal form, and have pointed stakes or 
 sword blades inserted into the faces; when several are used, in one 
 length, they are chained together to prevent the enemy from re- 
 moving them; and they are made of the lengths just mentioned in 
 order that they may be portable. 
 
 They are employed as temporary barriers to impede the passage 
 of a breach, the entrance into a work, to block up a street, &c.; 
 they are occasionally placed at the foot of the counterscarp of the 
 ditch, and, also, on the berme; in the latter situation they must be 
 covered from the view and fire of the enemy by a small glacis. 
 
 Abatis are large boughs or entire trees laid down in a line, with 
 the butt ends buried 3 or 4 feet in the ground, and the branches 
 turned towards the enemy: to form an efficient obstacle, the branches 
 ought to stand, at least, as high as a man's breast, the smaller parts 
 being cut ofi", and the larger pointed; the butts should be secured 
 in the ground by beams or trees picketed acrOvSS them, and they 
 should be covered with earth well rammed; this precaution will 
 make it difficult to drag them away. They ought, moreover, to be 
 covered by a glacis, that they may not bo seen and 'breached or, 
 destroyed at a distance, by artillery. 
 
 A detachment of 90 men can make about 750 feet of abatis in a 
 
 Some of the trees on the borders of a wood being formed into 
 abatis, may deter an enemy from attempting to penetrate into the 
 wood. A breastwork may be made of trunks of trees piled one on 
 another to the required height behind the abatis; this is soon done, 
 and it much increases the strength of the obstacles. 
 
 Trous cle lowp are holes dug in the ground in the form of an in- 
 verted cone or pyramid, and are made about 6 feet wide and 6 deep r 
 a pointed stake is planted at the bottom to prevent an enemy from 
 making use of them as rifle pits. In order to form an effective ob- 
 stacle, they should be disposed checker-wise in three rows, with in- 
 tervals of about 10 feet between them ; the earth from them should 
 be formed into a glacis, rather than heaped up between them, as in 
 the latter case they might be easily filled up. 
 
 Trous de loup of even two or three feet deep, may be usefully 
 employed in rendering impassable shallow wet ditches, inundations, 
 and fords; and, as well as abatis, they are suitable obstacles to the 
 advance of an enemy on the salients of works, on the weak points of 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 27 
 
 lines, or through their intervals ; they may thus compel the enemy 
 to attack the stronger parts. 
 
 The gorges of works may also be closed by abatis and trous do 
 loup, when there are no means of planting palisades for that pur- 
 pose. 
 
 A man can make one trou de loup in a day. 
 
 An Entanghmcnt is formed by cutting half through the stems of 
 small trees, and pulling the upper parts to the ground, to which they 
 are then picketed. 
 
 Crows feet are four iron spikes joined together at one end in 
 such a manner, that when thrown on the ground one point will al- 
 ways be uppermost; they may be quickly made by inserting four 
 spikenails iiito a small block of wood, so as to point in different di- 
 rections; they are chiefly employed to obstruct the advance of cav- 
 alry. 
 
 Pointed Stakes are frequently fixed in the ground, at any place 
 which the enemy might occupy at the time of an a^isault; as on the 
 bermes of works, the edges of trous de loup, and in the spaces be- 
 tween them. They must be firmly planted in the ground, and if 
 they are pointed before insertion, two mallets must be used, one of 
 which is provided with a conical hole to receive the point of the 
 stake, while the blows are struck with the other; these pickets may 
 be conveniently formed of the small branches cut from the trees in- 
 tended for abatis. 
 
 Common Fougasses are small mines placed in shafts or pits from 
 '3 to 10 feet deep. 
 
 The powder is lodged on one side of the shaft at the bottom, and 
 is fired from a secure spot by means of a powder hose, or fuse, which 
 is brought up one side of the vshaft, and carried in a trough (or 
 casing tube) parallel to the surl'ace of the ground; the trough 
 should be 5 or 6 feet below the ground if there is any danger of 
 shells falling on it; if not, 2 feet will be deep enough. 
 
 A shell foiiguss is formed by dividing a box into two parts by a 
 horizontal partition; the shells being loaded, are placed in the up- 
 per part, with the fuzes pointing down through holes in the parti- 
 tion in order that they may be ignited, at the same moment, by the 
 priming; the latter consists of a few pounds of powder placed in 
 the lower compartment. 
 
 Shell fougasses are very convenient obstacles to impede the pas- 
 sage of a ditch and the ascent of a breach, as they can be prepared 
 within the work, and speedily buried at the required spot just be- 
 fore their action is required. 
 
28 HELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 A stone fougass or rock mortar is thus formed. Excavate a shaft 
 at an inclination of about 45° to the horizon, and about 6 feet deep ; 
 at the' bottom place a charge of 55 lbs. of powder, then a strong 
 shield of wood (at least 6 inches thick) in front of the charge ; and 
 over the shield throw in 3 or 4 cubic yards of pebbles of not less 
 than half a pound weight each; a sufficient bod}^ of earth must be 
 heaped vertically above the charge, and retained over the upper 
 part of the shaft (near the edge) by a revetment of sods, to ensure 
 its effect taking place in the direction required. 
 
 Twelve men can make a stono fougass in three hours, which, 
 being charged as before described, will, when exploded, disperse the 
 materials over a circle of 30 or 40 yards radius, at about 60 yards 
 from the mouth of the shaft. 
 
 The usual and most effective position for fougasses is beyond the 
 ditch and over the salients Or other weak points of the work ; they 
 must be removed in advance of the ditch so far as not to injure tho 
 counterscarp by their explosion. 
 
 A good method of discharging fougasses at the moment required, 
 is to place a loaded musket with the muzzle in the priming and a 
 wire attached to the trigger; the wire can be led in any direction, in 
 the same manner as the hose, and being pulled at the proper mo- 
 ment, the explosion will take place. 
 
 INUNDATIONS. 
 
 It frequently occurs in the field that small streams or rivulets are 
 met with, which of themselves offer no impediment to the advance 
 of the enemy, but which, by judicious management, may be made 
 effectually to check his attack on certain points where the water may 
 be collected. 
 
 An inundation, or collection of water, is produced by forming 
 across a stream one or more dams, which must extend to a certain 
 distance from thence, according to the inclination (or slope) of the 
 ground contiguous to the stream, and to the required breadth of the 
 inundation. 
 
 A dam may be formed in the following manner : after construct- 
 ing an embankment of earth on each side of the stream perpendicu- 
 larly to its length, as far as the bank, stones and gravel should be 
 thrown into the water to diminish its depth ; then two heaps of earth 
 are prepared, one on each bank, and as many workmen being set on 
 as can be employed without impeding each other, the earth from 
 those heaps is thrown into the stream over the stones and gravel as 
 
FIELD rORTIFICATIONS. 29 
 
 rapidly as possible, until the embankments previously formed arc 
 connected together across the stream. 
 
 It rarely occurs that sufficient means are to be found in the field 
 to allow of a dam being made more than ten feet high ; and suppos- 
 ing this height to be given, the difference of level between any two 
 dams should be five feet, in order that the shallowest part of the 
 inundation may be five feet deep, and therefore, not fordablc. 
 
 The distance at which the dams should be placed from one another 
 will depend upon the I'all of the bed of the stream, and must be de- 
 termined by levelling. The thickness of the dam at top may be 
 made equal to the depth of the water intended to be retained, but if 
 it is liable to be battered by artillery, it sfiould be ten leet thick at 
 top. The exterior slope of the dam may be left at the natural slope 
 of the earth, while to that opposed to the stream a base of not less 
 than double its height should be given. 
 
 A sluice or waste weir should be provided at the height to which 
 it is desired the water should rise ; otherwise, the water being al- 
 lowed to flow over every part, the dam would be destroyed. These 
 openings, or waste weirs, must be revetted with fascines or timber, 
 and ought to be completed before the dam is carried up to its full 
 height. 
 
 Sometimes the inclination of the ground contiguous to the stream 
 prevents the inundation from attaining a depth greater than two or 
 three feet ; it may, notwithstanding, be rendered impassable, by 
 dig-ing pits and ditches in difierent parts before the water is allowed 
 to cover the ground. 
 
 The end of the dam on the enemy's side must be protected by 
 field works to prevent him from destroying it, or using it as a 
 bridge. When no work can be placed immediately to cover the 
 head of the dam, the approaches to it should be defended ; or if the 
 opposite bank be within short musket range, the end of the dam 
 may be covered by abatis. The works thrown up to cover the head 
 of a dam are traced precisely on the same, principles as those wlj^ich 
 are to protect a bridge. The best condition, therefore, when a 
 choice is possible, is, that the inundations should be concave to the 
 enemy. 
 
 Small islands may exist in the midst of an inundation, and on 
 these batteries or breastworks for musketry may be advantageously 
 formed, either to protect the dams, or for the general defence of the 
 position. 
 
30 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 TETES DE PONT. 
 
 Tete? de pont are works thrown up to cover a communication 
 across a river, to hinder the destruction of the bridge, and to defend 
 it until an army or detachment has-crossed over it. 
 
 They should be of sufficient streu^^th to be defended until the 
 whole of the troops have oro.ssed and the bridge has been taken up. 
 The works employed for this purpose vary according to the nature of 
 the ground to be occupied, the shape and width of the river, the 
 importance of the communication, &c. : they consist o-f redans, 
 lunettes, hornworks, or portions of any kind of field work. 
 
 If the bridge is seen irom any point en the bank, the tete de pont 
 should have at least one face, whose fire may sweep that point.— 
 Islands should be made to contribute to the defence by works erected 
 on them ; these should be breastworks for infantry, if the work is 
 within the range of that arm, or batteries for field guns. Advan- 
 tage should also be taken of the opposite bank tofortifiy it in a simi- 
 lar manrier. If these measures cannot be taken, auxiliary flanks 
 may be added to the faces of such- a work as a redan for the defence 
 of the salients. 
 
 A reduit is frequently constructed within a t(^to de pont, to cover 
 the bridge from the neighboring heights, and also to enable a small 
 party of the troops to keep the enemy in check until the n^jain body 
 has crossed, and the bridge has. been taken up \ this rear guard then 
 crosses the river in boats or rafts, protected by the fire from the 
 opposite side. 
 
 A battery should be constructed so as to enfilade the bridge, and 
 to destroy it, should the enemy force the reduit. 
 
 The faces or flanks of a tete de pont should have such directions 
 given to them that their fire may range directly along the banks. 
 
 The best position for a (temporary) military bridge and tete is at 
 a 4:e-entering bend of a river; viz., at a part v/hich is concave to- 
 wards the enemy's side, because then the bank whiih is in possession 
 of the force about to lay down the bridge, in part, envelope both 
 that and the t^te. Thus, while the bridge is covered from the view 
 of the enemy, breastworks or batteries may be advantageously 
 placed to assist in its defence, and at the same time to give an eftee- 
 tive cross fire in its front. 
 
 When, however, the bridge is to remain a considerable time, 
 these advantages must be given up, and a straight part of the river 
 chosen, beciuse there the current acts directly against the heads of 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 31 
 
 the boats or pontoons, whereas at a bend it acts obliquely against the 
 sides, and thus tends constantly to derange their positions. Again, 
 at a bend the current is constantly wearing away the concave side, 
 (or bank,) and depositing the earth thus removed at the next convex 
 bond, thus causing a shallow bank to be formed on one side of the 
 river and a deep part at the opposite side ; consequently at every fall 
 of the water, in such a place, one end of the bridge is left aground 
 on the shallow part, while the other end descends with the water, 
 and thus the bridge is in danger of being broken. 
 
 It is evident that the bed of a river will be less irregular, and that 
 fords will be most usually found where the course is straight; fords 
 are, however, occasionally found at the bends of ^ river in directions 
 obliquely across, from one convex part to the next on the opposite 
 side. 
 
 A ford should not be more than four feet deep for cavalry, three 
 feet for infantry, and two feet four inches for artillery. 
 
 LINES. 
 
 Lines are a series of works and trenches, or of independent works, 
 arranged so as to defend each other, and the ground in front of and 
 between them. 
 
 Lines are used to cover the front of a position, or to connect im- 
 portant redoubts or forts together. 
 
 Lines are of two kinds, such as are continuous, and such as have 
 intervals between the works. 
 
 The former are principally applicable to situations where it is pro- 
 posed to act on the defensive only, and where they are of such 
 limited extent that the whole line of parapet can be occupied with 
 troops exclusive of the reserves ; as, for instance, to close a pass be- 
 tween scarped mountains, or on the sea shore, or on the banks of 
 large rivers; thus resting on natural obstacles, which will prevent 
 their flanks being turned. They are often introduced as portions of 
 an extended line with intervals. 
 
 Extensive continued lines can make but slight resistance, while 
 the labor necessarily expended in executing them is considerable; 
 and as the enemy may menace several points at once, it follows that 
 nearly as many troops would be required for the defence as are em- 
 ployed in the attack, in which case the first principle of fortification 
 is violated. Even if the defenders have a sufficient number of dis- 
 posable troops, they act, when within lines, under a disadvantage, 
 for they must watch and follow every movement of the cneny, so as 
 
32 riBLD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 to be equaMy prepared to resist a false and a real attack. It has 
 often happened that while the defenders within lines were concen- 
 trating their forces to oppose a false attack, the enemy has pene- 
 trated at a point where he was net expected; and a continued line 
 once entered may generally be deemed lost. 
 
 Continuous lines of redans connected by curtains are constructed 
 in three ways : in the first, as described by Vauban, the salients of 
 the redans are at 240 yards asunder, and consequently the musketry 
 fire of one redan does not^ efi"ectively, defend the salient of the next. 
 To remedy this defect, it was subsequently recommended that the 
 ►salients of the redans should be brought within musket range of 
 each other, or within 160 yards. 
 
 In both of these constructions the flanking angles formed by the 
 faces of the redans and the curtains joining them much exceed 
 105°, and consequently the flanking defence is very imperfect. 
 
 In the third construction the salients are removed to 240 yards 
 from each other, (tlie original distance,) but the curtain is broken 
 into two parts, forming a salient angle, and thus the re-entering or 
 flanking angles are reduced to but little more than 90°, by which 
 means the flanking defence is greatly improved. 
 
 This tracing is, however, still defective, inasmuch as it presents 
 double the number of salients to the enemy's attacks, and the 
 branches of the broken curtains are exposed to be enfiladed, which 
 is not the case in Vauban's construction. 
 
 Lines of tenailles consist of parapets forming a series of salient 
 and re-entering angles, and are, in fact, like the improved redan 
 lines, except that, in this tracing, the redans are all of the same 
 size, and have obtuse angles. 
 
 They are traced by setting off distances of about 200 yards along 
 the front of the intended lines, to mark the position of the salient 
 angles; these intervals are then bisected, and perpendiculars drawn 
 towards the interior to give the places of the re-entering angles. 
 The perpendiculars should not exceed half the distance between the 
 salients, otherwise the re-entering angles would be less than right 
 angles. 
 
 Cremaillere lines are composed of alternate short and long faces 
 at right angles (or nearly so) to each other; the short faces, called 
 crotchets, are made about 30 yards long, and the long faces, called 
 branches, about 100 yards long. 
 
 These lines possess the following advantages : 
 
 1st. The branches are but little exposed to be enfiladed, owing to 
 the small projection of the salients. 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 33 
 
 2dly. Each branch is defended not only by the fire of the adjoin- 
 ing crotchet, but by several others. 
 
 3dly. Their outline is very easily adapted to all varieties of 
 of ground; and on slopes, in particular, they are very advantageous, 
 because a small additional height given to the crotchets will de- 
 filade a long extent of branch from the fire of an enemy on the 
 height. 
 
 Their defects are : 
 
 1st. The crotchets being short, very little of the ditch of each is 
 defended by the adjacent branch, 
 
 2dly. A battery which can enfilade one branch is equally able to 
 enfilade several. 
 
 CremailMre lines may be much strengthened by placing along" 
 their front bastions or double redans, at intervals varying from 690 
 to 800 yards, in order that a cross fire of artillery may be brought 
 from them in front of the other parts of the line. 
 
 The crotchets should face towards the bastions, or redans, in or- 
 der that the fire from the crotchets may defend the salients of those 
 works, and that the branches may be defiladed by being directed on 
 the bastions or double redans. When the line crosses a valley, the 
 branches may be most eff'ectually defiladed by giving the whole a 
 bend concave towards the exterior, and placing the bastions, or re- 
 dans, on the high ground; these works will thus form the more ad- 
 vanced parts of the line. 
 
 The flanks of the bastions must be connected with the next 
 crotchets on both sides by broken curtains, taking care that the re- 
 entering angles are not less than right angles. 
 
 Bastioned lines are made precisely in the manner already pointed 
 out for the fronts of bastioned forts; such lines may be strengthened 
 by lunettes, constructed at musket-shot distances in their front, and 
 having their faces directed upon those of the bastions, in order that 
 the ditches of the lunettes, and the ground in front of them, may 
 be defended by those faces. 
 
 The flanks of the lunettes give a direct and close fire in front of 
 the salients of the bastions ; but care must be taken in their con- 
 struction that they do not fire into each other; on this account, 
 when the fronts are in one straight line, it is usual either to sup- 
 press the flanks of the lunettes, or to place a lunette on every alter- 
 nate front only. 
 
 The communication from the lines to the gorge of each lunette 
 is by a caponniere, which is, generally, made broadest at the inner 
 end, in order, to enable the garrison to meet the enemy on a superior 
 
34 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 front, should he succeed in getting into it; its parapet is made only 
 3 feet above the ground that it may not mask the fire of the lines, 
 and consequently its interior must be sunk 4 or 5 feet to afford the 
 requisite cover; its breadth must be sufficient to allow room for a 
 banquette. A traverse is placed at its inner extremity, and perhaps, 
 (according to the nature of the ground and the length of the passage,) 
 at'intervals along the passage. 
 
 Sometimes the line changes its direction ; in such cases, when 
 the change causes the parts of the line to form with each other a 
 re-entering angle, the latter is one of the strongest parts of the 
 line. 
 
 LINES WITH INTERVALS, OR BROKEN LINES. 
 
 Broken lines should always, when practicable, be disposed in a 
 double row, and in such a manner that the inner works may flank 
 the outer; the advantages possessed by broken lines are: 
 
 1st. With the same extent as continuous lines, they require less 
 labor in the construction, and fewer troops to occupy them, conse- 
 quently large reserves may be formed. 
 
 2dly. The defenders may advance in force and in a regular for- 
 mation through the intervals, and attack the enemy, should he have 
 been thrown into confusion. 
 
 3dly. They oblio-e the enemy to overpower each separate work 
 before he can become possessed of the whole; whereas if a contin- 
 uous line be forced in one part, it is generally lost to the defenders. 
 
 4thly. If the enemy has gained one work he will then be exposed 
 to the flanking fire of the adjacent works^ and to a fire from the 
 works in the second line. 
 
 To profit fully by this advantage, when the front line consists of 
 closed works, their rear fjices ought to be of slight construction, 
 that the artillery of the second line may easily demolish those faces, 
 if the enemy should gain possession of the works. 
 
 When there are two lines of works, the heaviest artillery should 
 be placed in the inner line, or else the enemy, obtaining possession 
 of the exterior line, would turn the eruns against the other, and 
 have a superiority over the defenders. 
 
 When lines are on sloping ground descending towards the front, 
 the slope should, if possible, be cut very steep, so as to form an es- 
 carpment before the works. 
 
 A single row of redans or redoubts is comparatively weak, for the 
 fire from them crosses at a distance in front of the intervals, and 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 35 
 
 but feebly defend.s the salients. Lunettes are better in such a situa- 
 tion on account of the fire of the flanks, which may be brought to 
 cross the capitals close to the saHent angles. 
 
 The intervals between the works which form a broken line should 
 not exceed IGO yards, in order that they may be defended by an 
 effective cross fire from those works. 
 
 The different works should occupy the most prominent and the 
 highest ground ; also the flanking parts ought to be perpendicular 
 to their lines of defence. 
 
 The intervals between the works may be strengthened by artifi- 
 cial obstacles, or by a trench, for troops, with a rough parapet, (like 
 the first parallel in a siege,) having a broad interior slope to enable 
 the men to advance over it when occasion requires. 
 
 DEFENCE OF FIELD WORKS. 
 
 A spot selected for a military post should not be commanded, es- 
 pecially on the flank or in the rear, within the ordinary range of a 
 field piece. There should be plenty of materials on the spot to aid 
 in strengthening the works, or in forming obstructions in front of 
 them. The soil should be of a nature to be easily worked, and the 
 position should be difficult of access; it should, however, offer the 
 means of retreating in security, and with facility. 
 
 The highest ground of a position should be occupied by the 
 salients of works, for then the adjoining faces will be, in some mea- 
 sure, secured from enfilade fire; it follows that the re-entering an- 
 gles should be placed in the lowest spots. 
 
 It is very essential to create obstructions within short range of 
 musketry in front of all works of a t:^mporary nature, with a view 
 of breaking the order of the assailants, and detaining them under 
 a close and severe tire, if they persist in forcing their way through. 
 
 In fact, all the movements of an enemy, whether to the front, to 
 the right or left, should be a much cramped and impeded as possi- 
 ble; it is important to break his order and put him into confusion 
 when under fire, for he can seldom re-form under such circum- 
 stance ; and if he attacks in disorder, the chances are against his 
 success. 
 
 To save time in making palisades or stockade work, the whole 
 quantity ought to be divided into distinct portions, say 10 or 12 feet 
 in length, to one carpenter and two laborers; and to prevent confu- 
 sion in obtaining materials for constructing obstacles, it is well to 
 divide the men into parties of 8 or 10 each, prescribing to each 
 
36 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 party tlie nature of the materials, required, the place where they 
 are to be obtained, and the spot at which they are to be deposited. 
 
 The materials are obtained by felling trees, unroofing houses, tak- 
 ing; up floors, and the like. 
 
 The guns of a work should not, generally, reply to the cannonade 
 which precedes an assault, but should be placed behind traverses, or 
 other places of shelter previously prepared for them; they should 
 only fire at the enemy's artillery, while the latter is changing its 
 position. 
 
 Round shot or shells are fired against guns; grape, canister, 
 spherical case, and rockets against troops. 
 
 As soon as the enemy's light troops advance, the parapets are to 
 be manned; sand-bags previously filled are placed along the para- 
 pet, leaving loopholes between them ; they are musket-shot proof, 
 and give the men the necessary confidence to enable them to take a 
 steady aim. One rank of men is sujSicient on the banquette, others 
 being placed behind them to load. A reserve is to be stationed un- 
 der cover, who fall upon the assailants with the bayonet, should 
 they succeed in getting into the work. For a good defence there 
 ought to be a file per yard to man the parapet, with a reserve of 
 one-fourth or one-sixth of the whole, in addition. 
 
 As soon as the assaulting columns begin to mask the fire of their 
 own artillery, the guns of the work will be. brought up, and open 
 their fire on them. 
 
 A sortie (very rarely) may be made, should the enemy be thrown 
 into disorder; but this step requires great caution,, for should the 
 sortie be repelled, the enemy may enter the work with the retiriifg 
 troops. 
 
 Fouo;asses, having been previously prepared, will be fired the in- 
 stant the enemy is above them, by means of a piece of safety fuze, 
 or a musket with its muzzle in the powder and a wire to the trigger. 
 
 It the assailants at length descend into tlie ditch, shells, grenades, 
 and every sort of missile are to be thrown upon them. The shells 
 are rolled down by being placed in troughs laid on the superior 
 slope of the parapet. 
 
 If the enemy has to cross a river before he arriveSrat the work, 
 the fords may be rendered impassable for artillery and cavalry, by 
 digging pits, planting stakes, throwing in felled trees and harrows, 
 or by driving wagons or carts full of stones into the middle, and 
 taking off the wheels. 
 
 Should the ford be beyond musket range from the work, a 
 parapet may be raised opposite to it, at such a distance from it as to 
 
FIELD FORTIPICATIONS. 37 
 
 permit the defenders to issue forth and chara:e the party crossing it, 
 at the moment they land in disorder on the bank. 
 
 To prevent surprise, outposts are stationed round the work at 
 night, and heaps of dried brushwood, or tarred fascines, should be 
 placed along the post at intervals; at the approach of the enemy, 
 the outposts retire into the work, having set fire to the piles of 
 brushwood; this will, in a great measure, prevent an enemy from 
 concealing himself near the work. 
 
 LOOPIIOLING WALLS. 
 
 AYalls are made available for the purposes of defence by loophol- 
 ing them; if a ditch cannot, for want of time, be dug at the foot of 
 the wall outside, the loopholes ought to be, at least, 7 feet above the 
 ground to prevent the assailants from making use of them; in the former 
 case a temporary stage might be made of casks, ladders, &c., within 
 4 feet or 4 feet 6 inches of the loopholes, to enable the men to fire 
 through them. 
 
 The quickest way of loopholing a wall is to break- it down from 
 the top in the form of narrow fissures about 3 feet asunder; but if 
 the wall is very low, or there is not time to make loopholes, a piece 
 of timber, or the trunk of a tree, supported on the top of it by a 
 couple of stones, would be a ready expedient, and men could fire 
 from the opening under it; or sand-bags, or large stones or sods, 
 might be placed on the wall at intervals. The loopholes made in 
 walls or buildings can seldom be of any regular form ; the width 
 outside should not exceed 3 inches, but inside it may be equal to 
 the thickness of the wall. The best tools (of such as are usually 
 found about building) to break loopholes through a wall, are crow- 
 bars, pickaxes, and large hammers. 
 
 Barricades for roads and streets are made, if time permits, by 
 sinking a ditch 7 or 8 feet deep, and forming the earth into a 
 breastwork, adding palisades, &c.; but, if time presses, casks, boxes, 
 or cart bodies filled with earth, stones, manure or cinders, sacks of 
 flour, bales of merchandise, and the like, must be arranged across; 
 paving stones may be taken up and disposed in a similar manner. 
 
 The mass should be raised 6 or 7 feet high, and a banquette 
 formed for firing over it; the neighboring houses should also be 
 loopholed so as to give a good flanking fire over the ground in front 
 of the barricade, and stones may be collected to throw down on the 
 assailants from the contiguous houses. 
 
38 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 FORTIFYING HOUSES. 
 
 The great art of converting buildings, and the outhouses and 
 walls that usually surround them, into defensible posts, consists in 
 selecting from the mass of objects at hand such as will answer the 
 purpose, and in sacrificing every thing else ; making use of the mate- 
 rials to strengthen the part which is to be fortified. 
 
 The building chosen should possess some of, or all the following 
 requisites. 
 
 1st. It should command all that surrounds it. 
 
 2dly. It should be substantial, (not thatched,) and of a nature to 
 furnish materials useful for placing it in a state of defence. 
 
 3dly. It should be of an extent not too great for the number of 
 the defenders, and should only require for the completion of the 
 proposed object the time and means which can be spared.' 
 
 4thly. It should have projections flanking the walls and anoles. 
 
 5thly. It should be difficult of access on the side exposed to 
 attack, and yet have a safe retreat for the defenders ; and, of course, 
 it must be in such a position as to answer the purpose for which the 
 detachment is posted. 
 
 As a rough guide to judge of the third requisite, there ought to 
 be a man for every 4 feet of wall round the interior of the lower 
 story, one man to 6 feet for the second story, one to 8 feet for an 
 attic, with a reserve of about one-sixth of the whole. 
 
 Should there exist any doubt about having sufficient time to exe- 
 cute all that might be wished, it would be necessary to decide on 
 the best jpoints to be secured, in order to repel an immediate attack; 
 in such a case it might be well to employ as many men as could work 
 without hindering each other by being too crowded, to collect mate- 
 rials, and barricade the doors and windows on the ground floor, to 
 make loopholes in them, and to level any obstruction outside, that 
 would give cover to the enemy, or facilitate the attack ; to sink 
 ditches opposite the doors on the outside, and arrange loopholes in 
 the windows of the upper story; to make loopholes through the 
 walls generally, attending first to the most exposed parts, and to 
 break communications through all the party walls and partitions ; 
 to place abatis or any feasible obstruction on the outside, and to im- 
 prove the defence of the post by the construction of tambours; to 
 place outbuildings and garden walls in a state of defence, and es- 
 tablish communications between them ; to make arrangements (in 
 the lower story particularly) for defending one room after another, 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 39 
 
 SO that a partial possession only could be obtained on a sudden attack 
 being made. 
 
 These different works should be undertaken in the order of their 
 relative importance, according to circumstances; and after securing 
 the immediate object for which they were designed, they might re- 
 main to be improved on, if an opportunity should offer. 
 
 Houses are fortified by piercing loopholes through the walls, and 
 if the walls are high, two, or even three rows of loopholes may be 
 made, and a temporary scaffolding of furniture, casks, &c., erected 
 for firing from the upper oTies : one row may be made close to the 
 ground, with pits dug in the rear, or the floor may be cut through, 
 if there is a basement, for the convenience of making use of them. 
 The loopholes may have the dimensions before prescribed, and they 
 ought not to be made at a less distance than three feet from each 
 other, lest the wall should be too much weakened, or the defenders 
 inconveniently crowded. 
 
 The staircases are to be cut away, the communication being kept 
 up by ladders ; and the floors, as well as the partition walls, should 
 be loopholed. 
 
 Thatched roofs and all combustible materials are to be removed, 
 and barrels of water should be placed in every room in readiness to 
 extinguish fire. 
 
 A communication ought to be opened on the side furthest from the 
 enemy, through which ammunition and reinforcements may enter. 
 
 The door or barrier closing this communication may be made 
 musli:ct-proof by nailing strong planks to it, and if there is a base- 
 ment to the house, the floor should be cut away within the door, so 
 as to form a sort of ditch. 
 
 All the doors and windows are to be barricaded and loopholed. 
 The best barricade for a door is made by strong palisades, which are 
 secured to a thick cross beam let into the wall on each side; a bank 
 of earth may also be formed on the exterior. 
 
 A flanking defence can always be obtained by constructing a 
 tanibour in front of aside, or at the angles of a house. 
 
 All enclosures which may afford the enemy cover must be re- 
 moved, if not included in the defence. 
 
 If artillery is likely to ."be employed against the house, it will be 
 necessary, unless the walls are very strong, to support the timbers of 
 the roof by means of props. 
 
 If there is time, the house may be formed into a blockhouse by 
 pulling down the upper stories, and laying the materials over the 
 lower rooms to make the covering shell-proof. 
 
40 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 A ditch may be dug on the outside of the house, and the earth 
 placed against the walls : some protection may be obtained for the 
 doo/s, by placing strong beams against the walls on the outside in 
 an inclined position, and heaping earth or rubbish over them, 
 
 INTRENCHING A VILLAGE. 
 
 In intrenching a village, the buildings, walls, and hedges on its 
 circuit are to be considered as part of its enclosure, and are to be 
 made fit for the purposes of defence; all the intervals between them 
 are to be occupied by breastworks or palisades, and strengthened by 
 abatis. 
 
 The streets are to be barricaded at intervals with carts or wagons 
 having one or two wheels taken off, with barrels of earth, bales of 
 merchandize, &c. A passage should be made through the adjoining- 
 houses, which should be loopholed, and care must be taken that the 
 barricade be not turned by an enemy passing down the neighboring 
 streets. 
 
 Some strong building, such as a church, court-house, or jail, 
 should be selected, and fortified with particular care, to serve as a 
 citadel or reduit, to which the defenders may retire when driven in 
 from the exterior part of the village. 
 
 Advantage must be taken of any wajls or outbuildings surround- 
 ing whatever has been selected as the reduit or keep ; and they 
 should be converted into outworks for strengthening it as an inde- 
 pendent post. Should the village be of too great an extent for the 
 force thrown into it, a portion of it only might be strengthened, and 
 the remainder separated or destroyed ; or the defence might be con- 
 fined to some separate building. 
 
 The roads by which an enemy would advance should be cut up, 
 and obstructed with felled trees, ploughs, harrows, &c.; bridges 
 should be broken, and the passage disputed under cover of some 
 simple field work placed favorably to command the road. 
 
 The resolute defence of villages situated on the front of an army 
 has often decided the fate of a battle; in this position, they may be 
 regarded as bastions connected by movable curtains. 
 
 ATTACK ON FIELD WORKS. 
 
 The attack on field works maybe executed by surprise, or by open 
 force; the former can only take place when the advance of the as- 
 
FIELD FORTIEICATIONS. 41 
 
 sailants is concealed by fog or darkness^ or by the nature of the 
 ground, as in mountainous countries. 
 
 In the attack of field works by open force, it is advisable to ad- 
 vance against several points at the same njoment, when circum- 
 stances permit; of these some may be false attacks, and may be 
 converted into real ones if the enemy appears weak or hesitrvting on 
 the points threatened. One attack ought, generally, to be directed 
 upon the rear of the work, (if open at the gorge,) which will al- 
 ways lessen the confidence of the defenders. 
 
 As many assaulting columns should be formed as there are points 
 to be attacked, and before the works are stormed, pits and trenches 
 should (when time permits, and there is no natural cover for skir- 
 mishers) be dug to conceal riflemen: these pits are about four feet 
 wide, and, with the excavated earth raised before them, four feet in 
 depth, in order that they may serve to cover a file of men to that 
 height. 
 
 The artillery should be posted on the prolongations of the faces 
 to enfilade them, weaken the parapets, and ruin the interior defences 
 of the work and its ditch; for the latter purpose howitzers are best 
 adapted. As soon as the artillery has produced some effect, the 
 signal for the assault should be given; light troops will gradually 
 advance towards the counterscarp, in skirmishing order, firing at the 
 gunners through the embrasures; they will conceal themselves in 
 the pits and trenches prepared for them, or seek shelter in the ine- 
 qualities of the ground. They should be followed by storming par- 
 ties, and these should be accompanied by a detachment of sappers, 
 (or a squad of soldiers told off for that purpose,) carrying axes, 
 crowbars, bags of powder, &c., to force obstacles. Lastly, the re- 
 serve will follow, at some distance, to act as circumstances may re- 
 quire ; it may lepel attempts to aid the defenders, reinforce the 
 storming parties if they succeed in entering the work, or it may af- 
 ford them a rallying point, and cover their retreat if they fail. 
 
 Tlie troops descend into the ditch with unfixed bayonets, in order 
 to avoid accidents; and they fix them when on the berme. 
 
 Should the ditches have a great depth, it will be necessary to 
 lessen it by means of bags with heather or grass, or by bundles of 
 hay or straw, or fascines, &c. 
 
 A bridge formed of a gun limber and a ladder may be run up to 
 the counterscarp and thrown across. 
 
 To avoid mistakes in marching by night to attack, each soldier 
 should bear some visible mark by which ho may be distinguished 
 from an enemy. If a breach or any particular point is to be at- 
 
42 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 tacked by night, the way to it should be marked by distinguishable 
 l^ickets or other objects, placed or re-marked on the ground at the 
 time of the previous reconnoissance. • 
 
 The columns march to the assault in the direction of the capi- 
 tals ; but after passing the ditch, the troops should enter the works 
 by the faces, on each side of the salient angle, that they may pre- 
 sent a front in the work equal or superior to that of the enemy. 
 When it may be advisable to force an entrance at the gate of a for- 
 tified post, that gate may be destroyed by a piece of artillery brou >,ht 
 close up to it, or by a bag of powder attached to the wood by a gim- 
 let, or propped against it by a forked stick. - 
 
 In assaulting a place whose scarps and counterscarps are revetted 
 with masonry, scaling ladders must be employed. The first division 
 of each column of assault carries the longest ladders; they descend 
 into the ditch with them, and afterwards carry the ladders across 
 and raise them against the scarp. 
 
 The next division carries other ladders, which they place and 
 leave against the counterscarp. The ladders are carried and planted 
 with arms slung. Ladders planted against a wall are not to slope 
 above one-fourth of their height, lest they should break under the 
 weight of the men. 
 
 A strong tiring party is drawn up on the glacis to keep down the 
 fire of the defenders, if the latter should appear on the parapets to 
 oppose the assault. 
 
 ATTACKING HOUSES. 
 
 In the attack of houses, artillery should be employed to form a 
 breach before giving the assault, and also to throw hot shot, shells, 
 and carcasses. 
 
 If the detachment is unprovided with artillery, attempts must be 
 made to force passages through doors, windows, or unflanked parts 
 of the walls: the attack should be made on difiierent parts of the 
 building, to distract the attention of the defenders; in the mean 
 time, and for the same purpose, parties of men keep up a fire on 
 any points where there is a chance of disabling them. Attempts 
 may also be made to eflfect an entrance through the roof, by means 
 of ladders. 
 
 If the assailants' have neither powder nor crowbars for forcing 
 doors, a heavy beam or tree may, if at hand, be used as a battering 
 ram; a fire, of straw or brushwood may be made near the walls 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 43 
 
 further to distract and alarm the defenders, and to cover the opera- 
 tions of the assailants. 
 
 ATTACKING BARRICADES. 
 
 Artillery will soon clear a passage through ordinary barricades; 
 if not, the assaulting party must endeavor to turn the barricade, 
 either by passing down some other street, or by forcing a passage 
 from one house to another, until they arrive in rear of it : a few 
 loaded muskets applied to the locks and bolts of the strongest door 
 will force it open, and the partition walls may be destroyed by bags 
 of powder, &c. After having taken possession of a house, troops 
 must be left in it for the purpose of firing from it upon the barri- 
 cade. 
 
CHAPTER II. 
 
 ARTILLERY. 
 
 The pieces of artillery in ordinary use are: guns, howitzers, and 
 mortars. They are made either either of iron or brass, (gun 
 metal.) 
 
 Brass guns are made of' a metal composed of 8 parts of tin to 
 100 of copper, and cost about $900 per ton ; iron guns cost $100 
 per ton. 
 
 Brass guns are used for field batteries, as they can be made with 
 a less quantity of metal than iron guns of the same calibre, without 
 danger of bursting. Therefore, though brass is heavier than iron, 
 guns of the former metal are lighter than those of the latter. Brass 
 guns, are however soon rendered unserviceable by repeated and 
 quick firing. 
 
 Iron guns are better adapted for the attack or defence of for- 
 tresses, and for service on board of ship, being less expensive than 
 those of brass, and better able to sustain long continued and rapid 
 firing. 
 
 At the siege of St. Sebastian, each piece fired 350 rounds in 15? 
 hours without becoming unserviceable: brass guns could not have 
 fired 120 rounds in the same time, without drooping at the muzzle 
 and rumiing at the vent so much as to become useless. 
 
 The length of a gun is measured from rear of the base or breech- 
 ring to the face of the muzzle. 
 
 The CALIBRE is the diameter of the bore. 
 
 The DISPART is the excess of half the diameter of the base ring 
 (or thickest part of the gun) above half the diameter of the muz- 
 zle. Guns are made thicker at the breech than at the muzzle, the 
 better to resist the expansive force of the powder. 
 
 The TRUNNIONS are projections or arms one on each side of the 
 gun, by which it is secured and supported in the carriage. 
 
 The WINDAGE is the excess of the diameter of the bore over the 
 
ARTILLERY. 45 
 
 diameter of the shot, and is, in field 2:un«, about 1-40 the diameter 
 of the shot; in iron <j;uns it is about 1-G inch*. 
 
 Gruns are named according to the number of pounds contained in 
 the round shot they carry; thus a 6-pounder carries a G lb. shot; a 
 12-pounder carries a 12 lb. shot, etc. 
 
 The service charge of powder for battering is one-third of the 
 weight of the shot. 
 
 The charge for field guns is from 1-6 to 1-4 of the weight of 
 the shot, as a greater charge is found to injure the carriages with- 
 out producing an equivalent eff'ect. 
 
 For ricochet firing, the charge varies from 1-18 to 1-36 the 
 weight of the shot; and the elevation of the giin from 5° to 9°. 
 
 To increase the range of the gun, an increase of elevation above 
 a horizontal line must be given to the axis of the gun. 
 
 In pointing a gun, the line of direction is given from the trail, 
 and the elevation from the breech. 
 
 Point-blank position of the gun denotes that the piece is laid, 
 directly, at the object without elevation : to effect this, the lowest 
 notch on the side of the base ring, the notch on the side of the 
 muzzle, and the object to be fired at, are brought into one line; the 
 two notches are in a plane passing through the axis of the bore, 
 and that plane may be parallel or oblique to the horizon. 
 
 Point-blank range is the distance from the muzzle of the gun to 
 the first point at which the shot strikes the ground; it being sup- 
 posed that the latter is parallel to the axis of the bore. 
 
 If the gun is pointed at an object, by looking along the upper 
 surface of it, (for which purpose there is a notch behind the vent, 
 and one on the top of the muzzle,) it is said to be laid by the line 
 of metal, and it gives the gun an elevation of about one degree; 
 the breech being wider than the muzzle. 
 
 . The upper right hand quadrant of the base ring lias 12 quarter 
 degrees (called quarter sights) notched on it; by bringing the ob- 
 ject, the notch on the side of the muzzle, and any quarter sight 
 into one line, a corresponding elevation or depression is given to the 
 gun. 
 
 The -tangent-scale is raised from a groove behind the vent, and 
 can be fixed at any point of its length by a screw; it is divided in- 
 to quarter degrees from one degree upwards : by means of this scale 
 
 *J2, 9, and G-pounders have 1-10 inch windage; a 3-poandcr has 
 9-100 inch; 32-poiindor from 1-5 inch to 1-S inch, according to the length; 
 24-poiin(ler about 1-6 inch ; IS-poiinder about 1-7 inch. Carronades have 
 a windage of 1-64 the diameter of the shot. 
 
46 ARTILLERY. 
 
 the requisite elevation, as far as 6 or 8 degrees, may be given with 
 great accuracy, the object being seen in a line with the top of the 
 tangent-scale, and the notch on the top of the muzzle. 
 
 The point-blank range of light (brass) 12, 6, and 3-pounders, is 
 200 yards; medium 12 and 9-pounders, and heavy 6-pounders, 300 
 yards; iron (long) 24-pounders, 360 yards. 
 
 Every quarter of a degree of elevation increases the range of 
 each class by 100 yards until there are attained, respectively, the 
 ranges of 600, 700, and 1200 yards, after which each quarter of a 
 degree increases the range by a less amount than 100 yards. 
 
 Howitzers* are a short description of ordnance with chambers, 
 and are used, principally, for projecting shells horizontally or near- 
 ly so. _ 
 
 Their principal advantages are, that they can be more easily 
 loaded, and are considerably lighter, in proportion to the calibre 
 than guna; they may, also, be used as mortars: they have no dis- 
 part, the diameter of the base ring and swell of the muzzle being 
 equal, or the difference being made up by a patch on the muzzle. 
 
 Howitzers are intended for enfilade and ricochet firing, to reach 
 troops behind heights and parapets, and to breach earthen works by 
 firing shell into them : for these purposes heavy charges are not 
 necessary, although the bores may be large ; the chamber is formed 
 so as to confine the powder as much as possible, and so that the 
 shell may rest on its mouth. 
 
 Mortars differ from guns in the construction of their bore, their 
 chamber being in the shape of a frustum of a cone, by which 
 means the powder is confined, and the shell fits close to the sides; 
 they are also much shorter and thicker than guns : they have trun- 
 nions at the extremity of the breach, and are usually placed on their 
 beds so as to project shells, carcasses, or fire balls at an angle of 
 45°, the range being increased by augmenting the charge of pow- 
 der. 
 
 The shells discharged from mortars describe a high curve in their 
 flight, and fall with their full weight almost vertically upon the ob- 
 ject to be struck; they thus fracture the strongest buildings, and 
 bursting at the same time, they set fir0 to every thing combustible 
 about them. 
 
 Their splinters are also very destructive, and fly in all directions, 
 sometimes as far as 400 yards. As mortars fire over the parapet, 
 
 *Tlie charges for certain howitzers are as follows: — 10-inch, 7 ibs.; 
 8 inch, 4 fts.; 5^-inch, (24-poun(lNcr,) 2 to 2^ lbs.; 4 2-5 inch, (12^-i)ound- 
 er,) ^ to ^ lb. 
 
ARTILLERY. 47 
 
 and hot through embrasures, it is necessary that they should be 
 placed at a distance of 12 feet behind the crest of the parapet, sup- 
 posing it to be of the ordinary height. 
 
 Rockets are cyHndrical cases of pasteboard* or iron, attached to 
 one end of a rod of Wood, and containing a composition, which 
 being ignited, they are projected through the air by a force arising 
 from the combustion. 
 
 Military rockets terminate cither in a cone or a parabolid, and 
 may serve either as shells or carcasses : their weight is from 3 to 32 
 lb. They are, in general, fired from tulies, and the proper eleva- 
 tion is about a degree for each hundred yards in the intended 
 range. Fired against troops they create much disorder, and falling 
 on buildings, they destroy them or set them on fire. 
 
 The length of the rod is about GO diameters of the rocket, and 
 the composition with Avhich the cylinder is filled consists generally 
 •of saltpetre, sulphur, and charcoal or gunpowder. The composition 
 is rammed into the case, but a void space is left about the axis, in 
 order that a considerable surface may be at once in a state of com- 
 bustion. At the choke or neck of the rocket there are several aper- 
 tures, at one of which the fire is communicated to the composition. 
 
 The cause of the rocket's motion is, the excess of the pressure 
 produced by the burning material at the head of the rocket abcve 
 the pressure at the neck, when part of the flame escapes through 
 the apertures ; the stick serves to guide the rocket in its flight. 
 
 Shells are hollow shot with a hole to receive the fuse; they are 
 discharged, usually, from mortars and howitzers, and are charged 
 with a quantity of powder sufficient to burst them when at the end 
 of their range; the fuze being cut of such a length that the charge 
 may be ignited at the proper moment. 
 
 To breach earthen works, the shells are fired horizontally, from 
 howitzers, with reduced charges, that the fuze may not be extin- 
 guished before igniting the powder in the shell: this powder is a 
 bursting charge. 
 
 Carcasses are shells with three fuze holes; they are filled with a 
 a peculiar composition, which flames out of the holes with great 
 power and fury I'or about ten minutes: they are thrown fro..i mor- 
 tars, howitzers, and guns, to set fire to buildings, and sometimes to 
 serve as light balls. 
 
 Shrapnell shells, or spherical-case shot, are shells filled with mus- 
 ket balls, having a bursting charge of powder mixed with them. 
 
 * The former arc for signals, ahd the latter are for military service. 
 
48 ARTILLERY. 
 
 They are discharged from guns and howitzers, and have a fuze 
 like that of a coinmon shell, but shorter, in order that the shell 
 may burst in the air before the completion of its range; in this 
 manner musket balls and the splinters of the shell can be poured 
 into a column of troops at 1,200 yards distance. 
 
 Common case, or canister sho't, are cylindrical tin canisters with 
 wooden or iron bottoms, containing from 12 to 70 shot, which vary 
 in weight from 1^ oz. to 8 oz. each, according to the calibre of the 
 gun. As they burst nearly at the mouth of the gun, their effect 
 cannot be depended on beyond 200 yards, although they are used at 
 a greater distance. 
 
 Grape shot are of two patterns; either the balls are quilted 
 round* an iron pin with a circular plate at the bottom, or a pin runs 
 through a succession of plates, betw(^en every two of which is a tier 
 of balls; in the latter case they are also called 'Hier shot." 
 
 In the first pattern, the shot soon corrode the canvas quilting, 
 therefore the second is preferred : there are 9 shot in each round, 
 each shot varying in weight from 8 oz. to 4 lbs. according to the 
 caUbre of the gun ; the most effective range is about 200 yards. 
 
 Hand grenades are vshells of about 1 lb. 13 oz. weight, with a 
 fuze and bursting charge; they can be thrown; by the hand, about 
 25 or 30 yards; they are useful for the defence of breaches andun- 
 flanked works. 
 
 Gunpowder is composed of 75 parts saltpetre, 15 charcoal, and 
 10 sulphur in every hundred parts : a cubic foot of it weighs about 
 55 lbs. 
 
 A shell fuze is a funnel-shaped tube of well-seasoned beech, filled 
 with a composition of saltpetre, sulphur, and mealed gunpowder. 
 
 Portfire is a composition of saltpetre, charcoal, and sulphur, 
 pressed closely into a cylinder of white brown paper : they are made 
 in lengths of IG inches, and are used to discharge guns, to ignite 
 bags of powder, &c. 
 
 Portfire and shell fuzes burn" at the rate of one incli in five 
 seconds : Bickford's fuze (which will burn under water) burns 6 
 inches in 5 seconds, or 2 yards in a minute. 
 
 To fire shot or shells a ricochet, or in such a manner that they 
 make several bounds during their course, it is necessary to give the 
 gun or howitzer a charge, and an elevation depending on the extent 
 of the range required. In enfilading a work ricochet, the gun 
 should be placed nearly in the direction of the interior slope of the 
 parapet produced; and its elevation should be such that the shot 
 may just clear the crest of the parapet in front. 
 
ARTILLERY. 49 
 
 Ricochet firing against guns in a work, is useless if carried on at 
 a greater distance than 650 yards; the best range is about 400 
 yards. 
 
 Hound shot are sometimes fired red hot from heavy guns, to set 
 on fire buildings, blockhouses, shipping, and any defences in the con- 
 struction of which timber has been employed. 
 
 It requires about three-quarters of an hour to heat a 24 pound 
 shot when the furnace has been previously prepared; double that 
 time if not. In loading, a tight dry wad is placed over the powder, 
 and afterwards a wet wad, first soaked, and then well wrung; next, 
 the gun being slightly elevated, the shot is brought up, by means 
 of an instrument called the carrier, and rolled home; if it is re- 
 quired to depress the gun, another wet wad must be placed over the 
 shot. 
 
 A gun platform is a flooring of wood or stone, to prevent the 
 wheels or trucks of a gun carriage from sinking into the ground : 
 the garrison and siege platforms are 10 feet wide at the head, 15 
 feet long, and 14 feet wide at the splay or tail. 
 
 3 
 
CHAPTER ni. 
 
 MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY. 
 
 1. For instruction in the manual of light artillery, the piece se- 
 lected is the light 12-pclr. hcTvitzer, used for mountain service, oti 
 account of its simplicity, and as embracing all the principles re- 
 quired for serving a light field piece. It is generally transported 
 by mules. The piece and the shafts may be packed upon one mule, 
 the carriage upon another, and the ammunition chest upon the 
 third. The cayriage is adapted for draught. 
 
 In^ease the pieces are served by a iully organized company, a 
 jumper or short light pole, with a cross-piece of iron at the end, is 
 substituted for the shafts. A rope, attached to the axle-tree and 
 running through rings in the cross-piece, enables the detachments 
 to draw the pieces. In coming into battery, the rope is detached 
 and held in a coil ready for use. 
 
 2. The mule that draws the piece, or carries it when packed, is 
 called the shafi mule; the mule that carries the carriage, when 
 packed, the carriage mule ; and the mule on which the ammunition 
 chests are packed, the ammunition mule. 
 
 3. The piece is in hattery when the shafts are detached and it is 
 in a proper position to be fired. The front in this case is the direc- 
 tion towards which the muzzle points. The front, when the shafts 
 are attached,- is the direction towards which t^ie shaft point. The 
 right of the piece, in both cases^ is the right of the cannoneer when 
 facing to the front. 
 
 The position of the mules, when the piece is in battery, is as fol- 
 lows: 
 
 The ammunition mule fifteen yards in rear of the piece, the shaft 
 mule two yards in rear of the ammunition mule, and the carriage 
 mule two yards in rear of the shaft mule, all facing towards the' 
 piece. 
 
 4. In the order of march, with the hoicitzer mounted on its car- 
 riage, the shaft mule is hitched in, and the carriage and ammuni- 
 tion mules follow; the first two yards from the piece^ and the second 
 two yards from the first. 
 
o 
 
 3 
 
 O 
 5| 
 
 
 5 
 
 Page 50. 
 
MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY. 51 
 
 5. In tJie order of march, with the piece and carriage packed 
 upon the mules, the shaft mule leads, and the other two follow ; the 
 distance between each being two yards. 
 
 FORMING THE DETACHMENT. 
 
 6. Six men are required for the service of the piece. They are 
 formed in two ranks, and told off from the ri^ht by the chief of 
 piece; Nos. 1 and 2 being on the right, No. 8 and the gunner being 
 in the centre, and Nos. 4 and 5 on their left; the even numbers 
 anti the gunner being in the i'ront, and the odd numbers in the rear 
 rank. 
 
 The detachment is iliarchcd to the piece, and posted as follows: 
 
 POSTS OF THE DETACHMENTS, 
 
 7. In hattery. Nos. 1 and 2 about one yard outside of the wheels, 
 and in line with the axle-tree, No. 1 being on the right, and No. 2 
 on the left; the gunner at the end of the trail; No. 3 opposite the 
 knob of the eascable, covering No. 1; No. 4 on the right, and No. 
 5 on the left of the ammunition mule; all Aicing to the front. The 
 chief of piece is opposite to the trail, outside of and near the left 
 cannoneers. 
 
 8. hi hattery, withont mules. Nos. 4 and 5 are on the right and 
 left of the ammunition chests, facing to thc' front. 
 
 9. In the order of march, shaft mides hitched m. Nos. 1 and 2 
 opposite to the muzzle; the gunner and No. 3 opposite to' the trail;- 
 and Nos. 4 and 5 opposite to the saddle of the ammunition mule ; 
 the gunner and even numbers on the right, and the odd numbers on 
 the left; all facing to the front, and covering each other in lines 
 one yard from the wheels. The chief of piece is on the left of the 
 driver of the shaft mule. 
 
 10. In the order of march, mules pached. Nos. 1 and 2 at the 
 shaft mule ; the gvinner and No. 3 at the carriage mule ; and Nos. 
 4 and 5 at the ammunition mule; he gunner and even numbers on 
 the right and odd numbers on the left; all opposite to the saddles, 
 one yard from the mules, and facing to the IVont. The chief of 
 piece is on the left of the driver of the shaft mule. 
 
 11. There is one driver to each mule. [le is on the left of the 
 mule, and holds the reins with the right hand, six inches from the 
 mouth, the hand high and firm. 
 
52 MAlfUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY. 
 
 SERVICE OF THE PIECE. 
 
 12. The piece is in battery, the men at their posts. (No. 7.) 
 The shafts are placed on the ground, one yard and a half from 
 
 the line of the right wheel, and parallel to it^ the cro^:s-bar opposite 
 to the trail, the shafts pointing to the rear. 
 
 The chests, when the ammunition mule is absent, are on the 
 ground, fifteen yards in rear of the trail, their sides parallel to the 
 axis of the piece, backs together, the turnbuckles outside. 
 
 13. At the command Take Equipments, the gunner distribufes 
 the equipments. No. 1, with the assistance of No. 3, takes out the 
 sponge. The gunner equips himself with the belt containing the 
 hausse and priming wire, and with the knee-guard and the finger- 
 stall, wearing the last on the second finger of the left hand. No. 
 3 wears the tube pouch containing friction tubes and the lan- 
 yard. Nos. 1 and 2 wear bricoles hung from the left shoulder to 
 the right side. Nos. 2 and 5 wear haversacks hung from the right 
 shoulder to the left side. 
 
 THE COMMANDS. 
 
 14. In loading by detail, the instructor gives all the commands. 
 The commands are: Load hy detail, Load, 2, 3, 4; Sponge, 2, 
 
 3, 4; Ram, 2, 3; Ready; Fire; and Cease Firing. 
 
 When the service of the piece is not executed by detail, the 
 commands of the instructor are, either Load, Commence Firing, 
 and Cease Firing ; or, Commence Firing and Cease Firing. 
 After the command Comence Firing, the action is continued with- 
 out further commands from the instructor until the command Cease 
 Firing. 
 
 The last command is repeated by the chief of piece and the 
 gunner. 
 
 duties of the cannoneers. 
 
 15. Duties of tlie Gunner. — In action, the gunner gives or re- 
 peats the commands of execution. At the command or signal to 
 commence firing, he gives the word Load; plants the left foot op- 
 posite to the knob of the cascable; places the right knee wpon tlie 
 ground near, and on the left of the trail ; places the hausse, when . 
 it is used; seizes the lunette with the right hand, to give the direc- 
 
MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY. 58 
 
 tion, and at the same time tends vent with the second finger of the 
 left hand, the thumb on the base of the breech. 
 
 As soon as the piece is loaded and aimed, he removes the hausse; 
 then rising pricks the cartridge; gives t|ie word Heady, and step- 
 ping clear of the wheel to the side whence he can best observe the 
 effect of the shot, gives the command, Fire. He continues the ac- 
 tion in the same manner, without farther commands from the in- 
 structor, until the firing is ordered to cease. 
 
 When the instructor, instead of giving the command Commence 
 Firing, gives that of Load, the gunner repeats it, and performs 
 the same duties as just described, except that he does not command 
 Fire, until the firing is ordered to commence. 
 
 When the instructor gives all the commands, the gunner performs 
 the same duties, but without repeating the commands. 
 
 16. Duties of No. 1. — Until the command Load, he stands 
 square to the front, in line with the axle-tree, holding the sponge 
 staff about the middle in the right hand, and trailing it at an angle 
 of 45°. 
 
 For the convenience of instruction, the duties of No. 1 are di- 
 vided into motions. 
 
 First motion. — At the command Load, No. 1 faces to his left, 
 steps obliquely to his right with the right foot, and brings the sponge 
 into a perpendicular position over the right toe, the elbow close to 
 the side, the right hand at the height of the elbow. ^ 
 
 Second motion. — He plants tlie left foot near, and in line with the 
 wheel, and inclines the sponge across the body to the left, the right 
 opposite to the middle of the body. 
 
 Third motion. — He places the right foot twelve inches to the 
 right of the left, heels on the same line; brings the sponge into a 
 horizontal position, and extending the hands towards the ends of 
 the staff, back of the right hand up, that of the left down, rests the 
 sponge-head against the face of the piece; the knees straight, the 
 feet turned out equally, and the body inclined forward. 
 
 Fourth motion. — He introduces the sponge, drops the left hand 
 by the side of his thigh, and shoves the sponge to the bottom of the 
 chamber. 
 
 17. At the command SpOxNGE, he carefully sponges out the 
 chamber. 
 
 Second motion. — He draws out the sponge, pressing it upon the 
 bottom Q§ the bore, seizes the staff near the sponge-head with the 
 lel't hand, back down, and rests it against the face of the piece. 
 
 Third motion. — He turns the sponge over by bringing the hands 
 
64 MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY. 
 
 together at the middle of the staif, and giving it a cant with each, 
 throws the sponge over; at the same time turning the wrists so as to 
 bring the stalf horizontal. He then extends the hands towards the 
 ends of the staff, back of the left up, that of the right down. 
 
 Fourth motion. — As soon as the charge is inserted he introduces 
 the rammer-head into the muzzle, and joins the left hand to the 
 right. 
 
 18. At the command Kam, he sends the charge carefully home, 
 throwing the left hand over the piece. 
 
 Second ynotion. — He draws out the sponge with the ri^ht hand, 
 letting it slide through tne hand as far as the middle of the staff, 
 when he grasps it firmly, and seizing i<-. close to the rammer-head 
 with the lelt hand, back up, rests it against the face of the piece. 
 
 Third motion. — He raises the sponge to the height of his breast, 
 and steps back, right foot .first, to his position opposite to the axle- 
 tree ; quits the staff Ivith the left hand, and throwing the sponge 
 uppermost, holds it at a trail in the right. He remains facing the 
 piece until the command Load, when he steps up and performs the 
 duties just described. 
 
 When the loading is not by detail. No. 1 goes through all his 
 duties at the command Load. 
 
 At the flash of the gun, or command Load, he rtcpsup and again 
 performs his duties as before, and so on, until the command" Cease 
 Firing is given. At this command he resumes his post, faces to 
 the front, first sponging out the piece if it has been commenced. 
 
 19. Duties of NoH. 2 and 5. — Until the command Load, Nos. 2 
 and 5 .stand square to the front, the former in line with the axle- 
 tree, the latter on the left of the ammunition mule, or chests. 
 
 At this command, No. 2 faces about and goes to the -ammunition 
 chesr; and No. 5, having received a round of ammunition from No. 
 4-, carries it to the piece ; placing hims^elf opposite to No. 1, and in 
 line with the wheel, inserts the charge as soon as No. 1 has sponged, 
 then steps back to the post of No. 2, opposite to the axle-tree, and 
 there remains facing the piece until it is fired, when he returns to 
 the ammunition chest, No. 2; having received a round of ammuni- 
 tion, carries it to within five yards of the wheel, where he remains 
 until the piece is fired ; he then moves forward and executes the 
 remaindxjr of the service as just described for No. 5. 
 
 Nos. 2 and 5, in moving to and from the. piece, go at a run and 
 pass each other by the right. * 
 
 In inserting the charge they should be careful to keep the seam 
 down, and to place the fuze in the axis of the bore. 
 
MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY. 65 
 
 At the command Cease Firing, they resume their posts, facing 
 to the front. 
 
 20. Duties of No. 3. — No. 3 holds the handle of the lanyard in 
 the right hand, the cord passing between the fingers, the hook be- 
 tween the forefinger and thumb. At the command Load, he takes 
 a friction tube in the left hand, and passes the hook of the lanyard 
 through the eye of the tube from right to left, continuing to hold the 
 hook between the thumb and forefinger. At the word PiEADY, he 
 faces the piece, and steps up, keeping outside of the wheel ; inserts 
 the tube, steps back with the right foot, breaks to his rear a full 
 pace with the left foot, and holds the lanyard slightly stretched, the 
 handle at the height of the knee, back of the hand up, the left hand 
 against the thigh. At the command Fire, he gives a smart pull 
 upon the lanyard, being careful to keep the hand low, and then re- 
 sumes his post. 
 
 At the command Cease Firing, he winds the lanyard upon its 
 handle, and if dry, puts it in the tube pouch. 
 
 21. Duties of No. 4. — No. 4 attends at the ammunition chest, 
 serves out ammunition, and prepares and inserts fuses. 
 
 CHANGING POSTS. 
 
 22. In order to instruct the men in all the duties at the piece, the 
 instructor causes them to change posts by the following commands : 
 
 1. Change Posts. 2. March. 
 
 At the first command, the cannoneers on the right of the piece 
 face about, take off their equipments, and place them on the piece 
 or ammunition chests. At the second command, all step off, each 
 taking the post and equipments of the one in his front ; No. 2 pass- 
 ing around the muzzle to gain the post of No. 1, and No. 4 around 
 the ammunition chest to take that of No. 5. 
 
 23. During the intervals of rest, the instructor will explain to the 
 men the nomenclatures of the piece and carriage, and the names 
 and uses of the implements and equipments. 
 
 SERVICE OF THE PIECE WITH DETACHMENTS OF DIFFERENT 
 
 STRENGTHS. 
 
 24. Two men. The gunner commands, tends vent, points, pricks, 
 primes, and fires. No. 1 sponges, serves ammunition, and loads. 
 
56 MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY. 
 
 Three men. The gunner commands, tends vent^ points, pricks, 
 primes, and fires. No. 1 sponges. No. 2 serves ammunition, and 
 loads. 
 
 Four men. The gunner commands, tends vent, points and pricks. 
 No. 1 sponges. No. 2 serves ammunition, and loads. No. 3 primes 
 and fires. 
 
 Five Men. No. 4 attends at the chests, and serves ammunition 
 to No. 2, occasionally alternating with him. The other numbers 
 serve as with four men. 
 
 Six men. No. 5 alternate habitually with No. 2. No. 4 remains 
 at the chests. The other numbers serve as with four men. 
 
 THE LOCKING ROPE. 
 
 25. The locking rope is habitually coiled and suspended from 
 the front arc of the saddle of the shaft mule. AVhen it becomes 
 necessary to use it in order to prevent the too great recoil of the 
 piece, No. 2, on receiving orders to that efiect, brings it up from the 
 mule, and, with the assistance of No. 1, locks the wheels. No. 2 
 attaches one end of it by a timber hitch to the folly of the left 
 wheel, near the ground, and No. 1 attaches the other end in the 
 same manner to the right wheel, the rope passing over the stock. 
 
 The length of the rope should.be regulated by the nature of the 
 ground. 
 
 When in firing it becomes necessary to run the piece "forward, the 
 locking rope is detached ; No. 2 carries it; and it is re-attached as 
 soon as the piece is in battery. When not in use it is placed on the 
 ground, outside of and near No. 2. 
 
 When the firing is to be discontinued, No. 2 returns it to its place 
 on the saddle. The locking rope should not be used when it can 
 be avoided; since on rough ground it is liable to break the wheels, 
 and on soft ground to upset the carriage. 
 
 ATTACHING AND DETACHING THE SHAFTS. 
 
 26. To attach the shafts, the instructor commands : 
 
 Attach Shafts. 
 
 TRe gunner raises the trail ; No. 3 springs in between the shafts, 
 seizes them about twelve inches from the cross-bar, and places the 
 supporting bar upon the trail ; the gunner then puts in the key and 
 
MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY. 5T 
 
 lowers the trail to the ground. No. 1, with the assistance of No. 3, 
 puts up the sponge ; and the cannoneers about the piece assume their 
 posts as in the order of march, shaft mule hitched in. 
 
 27. To detach the shafts, the instructor commands : 
 
 Detach Shafts. 
 
 The gunner raises the trail, and unkeys the shafts; No. 3 springs 
 in between them, seizes them about twelve inches from the cross- 
 bar, (the gunner at the same time lowering the trail to the ground,) 
 detaches, and places them as prescribed in No. 12. 
 
 No. 1, with the assistance of No. 3, takes out the sponge; and the 
 cannoneers about the piece take their posts as in battery. 
 
 MOVING THE PIECE BY MEANS OF THE CANNONEERS. 
 
 28. The shafts detached. The instructor commands : 
 
 1. By hand to the front {or rear?) 2. March, 
 
 At the first command Nos. 1 and 2, facing to the front, (or rear,) 
 apply themselves to the wheels with the hand nearest to the piece, 
 the former carrying the sponge, and the latter the locking rope in 
 the hand farthest from the piece; the gunner raises the trail. 
 
 At the second command, all step off. At the command. Halt, 
 they resume their posts. 
 
 29. ^'hen hricoles are to he used, the shafts attached. The in- 
 structor commands : 
 
 1. By hricoles to the front (or rear.) 2. March. 
 
 At the first command, Nos. 1 and 2 attach the hooks of their 
 bricolcs to the washerhooks, and hold the rope with the hand nearest 
 to the piece; the gunner and No. 3 apply themselves to the shafts; 
 all fiicing in the direction they are to move. 
 
 At the second command, all step off. 
 
 At the command. Halt, they resume their posts ; Nos. 1 and 2 
 unhooking their hricoles with the hand nearest to the piece. 
 
 30. Vtithout hricoles, the shafts attached. The instructor com- 
 mands : 
 
 1. Forward. 2. March. 
 
 At the first command, the gunner and No. 3 apply themselves to 
 the shafts; Nos. 1 and 2 at the wheels, as in No. 28. 
 
58 MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY. 
 
 At the second command, all step oflF. At the command, Halt, 
 they resume their posts. 
 
 When the movement requires it, Nos. 4 and 5 carry the ammuni- 
 tion chests to their new position. 
 
 No. 3 carries the shafts when they are detached. "^ 
 
 SERVICE OF SEVERAL PIECES. 
 
 31. Forming, and marching the detachments to and from the 
 pieces, are executed as in field artillery. 
 
 POSTING AND CHANGING THE POSITION OF DETACHMENTS. 
 
 32. To form the order of r^iai'cli, the detachments being in line in 
 front. The instructor commands : 
 
 1. Detachments, to your i)osts. 2, MaRCH. 
 
 At the first command, the chiefs of pieces face the detachments 
 to the right. At the second, the detachments, Nos. 1 and 2 opening 
 out, file to their posts, each member halting at his place. The 
 chiefs of pieces face them to the front by the command, About 
 Face. 
 
 To form the order of rtiarch, the detachments being in line, in rear, 
 the instructor gives the same commands. 
 
 At the first command, the chiefs of pieces face the detachments 
 to tlip left, at the second, the detachments march to their posts ; 
 each number halting as before. 
 
 33. From the order of march, to the front (or rear.) The in- 
 structor commands : 
 
 1. Detachments front (or rear.) 2. March. 
 
 To the front. At the second command, repeated by the chiefs of 
 pieces, the detachments. No. 3 and the gunner closing to the centre 
 when clear of the mule, march to the front, file to the left, and are 
 halted, and faced to the front by the chiefs of pieces. 
 
 To the rear. At the first command, the chiefs of pieces face the 
 detachments about, Nos. 4 and 5 standing fast. At the second 
 command, the detachments, Nos. 1 and 2 closing to the centre as 
 they advance, march to the rear, file to the left, are halted and 
 faced to the front by the chiefs of pieces. In both cases Nos. 4 and 
 
MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY. 59 
 
 6 take their places on the left, when the detachment is in the posi- 
 tion ordered. 
 
 HITCHING AND UNHITCHING. 
 
 34. To the front. The instructor commands : 
 
 Hitch to the front. 
 
 At this command, the shafts are attached, (No. 26,) and the 
 gunner and No. 3 brine: the piece about, each by means of the shaft 
 on his own side. 
 
 The mule, passing on the right of the piece, is led by its driver 
 to the front and hitched in, the driver backing the mule and buck- 
 ling the breast straps to the staples ; the gunner and No. 3 buckling 
 the thill straps around the shafts through the staples, and the breech 
 straps to the staples. 
 
 35. To the right {or left.') The instructor commands : 
 
 Hitcli to the right (or left.) 
 
 At this command the shafts are attached, and turned in the 
 proper direction, and the mule, inclining to the right or left, is led 
 to its place, and hitched in as before. 
 
 36. To the rear. The instructor commands : 
 
 Hitch to the rear. 
 
 At this command, the shafts are attached, the mule brought up, 
 faced about, and hitched in as before. 
 
 37. In hitching in to the front, the carriage and ammunition 
 mules, the former first passing the latter, are led up to their proper 
 positions. 
 
 In hitching in to the right, (or left,) the mules are, in like man- 
 ner, led up and wheeled to the right or left, at the proper intervals. 
 
 In hitching in to the rear, the carriage and ammunition mules, 
 following the shaft mule in the order named, are led past the piece 
 to their position in the rear. 
 
 For the position of the mules, see No. 3. 
 
60 MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY. 
 
 UNHITCHING AND COMING INTO ACTION. 
 
 38. To the front. The instructor commands : 
 
 Action Front. m 
 
 At this command, the mule is unhitched, the driver unbuckling 
 the breast straps, and the gunner and No. 3 the breech and thill 
 straps. The driver then leads the mule to its place in rear, and the 
 gunner and No. 3, supporting the shafts till the mule is taken out, 
 bring the piece about. This done^ the shafts are detached and 
 placed as above. 
 
 The carriage and ammunition mules are led at once to their posi- 
 tions, (see No. 3.) 
 
 39. To the right, left, or rear. The instructor commands : 
 
 Action right, (left, or rear.) 
 
 At this command, the mule is unhitched; the piece placed in 
 the required direction ; the shafts detached, and each mule led to 
 its proper position. 
 
 In action rear, the carriage and ammunition mules pass by the 
 right of the piece to their places in rear. The mules face towards 
 the piece as in action front. 
 
 PACKING AND UNPACKING. 
 
 40. The mule unhitched, and shafts detached. The instructor 
 commands : 
 
 1. Prepare to pack the Piece. 2. Pack the Piece. 
 
 At the first command, the driver leads the shaft mule three yards 
 in rear of the piece, the crupper towards the trail; No. 1, after re- 
 moving the right cap square, takes the sponge and inserts the ram- 
 mer head to the bottom of the bore ; and No. 2, after removing the 
 left cap square, takes the handspike, and passing one end to No. 3, 
 places it* under the knob of the cascable, the loop around the neck. 
 All face towards the mule and prepare to raise the piece. 
 
 At the second command, they raise the piece. No. 1 inclining 
 slightly to his left to clear the wheel, and place it upon the saddle, 
 
MANUAL . f OE LIGHT ARTILLERY, 61 
 
 tlie trunnions in their beds, the vent up, and the cascable towards 
 the head of the mule. No. 1, then withdrawing the sponge, places 
 it, and the handspike which he receives from No. 2, upon the car< 
 riage,' and goes to the shafts. No. 3, with the assistance of No. 2, 
 secures the piece firmly to the saddle by means of the lashing 
 rope. 
 
 For this purpose he passes one end of the rope (the other being 
 fastened to the near hook of the lashing girt) over the piece to No. 
 2, who passes it back beneath the transoms, receives it again over the 
 piece, and then fastens it, drawing the rope tightly to the ofi" hook 
 of the lashing girth. This done, No. 1 turns the shafts round and 
 carries them near the mule, and Nos. 2 and 3 seizing them near the 
 cross-bar, with the a.ssistance of No. 1 acting at the ends, raise and 
 place them upon the mule, resting the cross-bar upon the cascable, 
 and the shafts upon the arcs ] Nos. 2 and 3, the latter first putting 
 the key in its place, then secure the shafts firmly by means of the 
 lashing straps. 
 
 PACKING THE CARRIAGE UPON THE MULE. 
 
 41. The instructor commands : 
 
 1. Prepare to pack the Carriage. 2. Pack the Carriage. 
 
 At the first command, the driver leads the carriage mule in front 
 of the carriage, and three yards from it, the crupper towards the 
 head of the carriage ; the gunner, first replacing the cap squares, 
 raises the head of the carriage, and Nos. 4 and 5, at the right and 
 left wheels respectively, remove the linchpins and washers, take off" 
 the wheels, and lay them on the ground behind them, the larger 
 end of the nave uppermost. This done, Nos. 4 and 5 replace the 
 linchpins and washers, and seize the arms of the axle-tree; and the 
 gunner, quitting the head of the carriage, seizes the trail; all face 
 towards the mule, and prepare to raise the carriage. 
 
 At the second command, they raise the carriage and place it upon 
 the saddle, between the transoms; the axle-tree just in front of the 
 forward arc, the understraps upon the arc, and the nuts of the trun- 
 nion plate bolts just in rear of it. The carriage having been placed. 
 No. 4, with the assistance of No. 5, secures it with the lashing cord, 
 taking two turns with the cord round the stock and transoms, and 
 then tying it. This done, they suspend the wheels by the fellies, 
 from the arms of the axle trees ; the large end of the nave between 
 
62 MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY. 
 
 the arcs, and resting against the leather of the outside bar, and se- 
 cure them firmly by means of the lashing straps. 
 
 The whole is then strongly bound by the lashing rope. For this 
 purpose, No. 5, having fastened one end to the near hook of the lash- 
 ing girth, passes the rope up from the inside between the nearest 
 convenient felly and spoke, and conlinues it on, pressing it in front 
 of and against the outside part of the nave, embracing one or more 
 spokes^ to the top felly, under which, and over the stock, he passes 
 it to No. 4, who, after passing it round a spoke of the off wheel, re- 
 turns it under the transoms of the saddle to No. 5 by whom it is 
 passed round a spoke and again handed over the stock to No. 4. 
 The latter then cames it down under the top felly, around the 
 spokes, and against the nave, as with the near wheel, to the off 
 hook of the lashing girth, and then fastens it. 
 
 For greater security, the gunner may tie the fellies of the two 
 wheels together, behind the elevating screw, with the locking rope. 
 
 ' PACKING THE AMMUNITION CHESTS UPON THE MULE. 
 
 42. The instructor commands: 
 
 1. Prepare to pack the Chests, 2. Pack the Chests. 
 
 At the first command, the driver leads the mule from the rear to 
 the distance of one yard from the chests, its head still facing 
 them; Nos. 2 and 4 hasten to the chest on the right, and Nos. 1 
 and 5 to that on the left, and seize them by the handles; Nos. 1 
 and 2 by those in front, and Nos. 4 and 5 by those in rear. 
 
 At the second command, they raise the chests, carry them to the 
 saddle, and attach the chains to the hooks, the. chests inclining 
 slightly towards the rear of the mule ; Nos. 4 and 5 then secure 
 them with the lashing straps and lashing rope* 
 
 This duty might be done with three men, by first hooking on one 
 chest, and letting one man support it until the other is hooked on. 
 
 PACKING the mules AT ONE COMMAND. 
 
 43. The instructor commands : 
 
 Pack the 7nules. 
 
 At this command, the driver leads the mules to their proper posi- 
 tions; Nos. 1, 2, and 3 proceed/ to pack the piece, and Nos. 4, 5, 
 
MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY. 63 
 
 and the gunner the carriage, as soon as the piece is removed. This 
 done, Nos. 1, 2, 4, and 5 pack the ammunition chests. 
 
 Each cannoneer performs his duty as directed in Nos. 40, 41,,42. 
 
 UNPACKING THE CARRIAGE. 
 
 44. The instructor commands : 
 
 1. Prepare to unpack the Carriage. 2. Unpack the Carriage. 
 
 At the first command, Nos. 4 and 5 unbuckle the lashing straps, 
 detach the lashing rope, take oflf the wheels, and lay them upon the 
 ground, the large end of the nave uppermost. If the locking rope 
 has been used, the gunner unties and detaches it. Nos. 4 and 5 
 then untie and remove the lashing cord, and facing to the rear, seize 
 the arms of the axle-tree; the gunner facing to the front seizes the 
 trail. All prepare to raise the carriage. 
 
 At the second command, they raise the carriage, and carry it 
 three yards in rear of the mule; the gunner then, placing the trail 
 upon the ground, seizes the head of the carriage and holds it up ; 
 Nos. 4 and 5, removing the linchpins and washers, retain them in 
 their hands, put on the wheels, and then replace the linchpins and 
 washers. The gunner puts up the locking rope, and Nos. 4 and 5 
 the lashing rope. 
 
 unpacking the piece. 
 
 45. The instructor commands : 
 
 1. Preparie to unpack the Piece, 2. Unpack the Piece. 
 
 At the first command, the driver leads the mule in rear of and 
 three yards from the carriage, the crupper towards the trail;' Nos. 
 2 and 3 unbuckle the lashing straps, and, with the assistance of No. 
 1 acting at the ends, disengage the shafts from the saddle; No. 1 
 then takes hold of them near the cross-bar, turns them round, and 
 lays them on the ground, in the position described in No. 12. This 
 done, Nos. 2 and 3 detach the lashing rope ; and No. 1, having 
 taken the sponge and handspike, hands the latter to No. 2, and in- 
 serts the former into the bore of the piece. No. 2 then applies his 
 handspike as in No. 40 ; when all, facing towards the carriage, pre- 
 pare to rais-3 the piece. 
 
64 MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY. 
 
 At the second command, they raise the piece, No. 1 inclining 
 slightly to his right to clear the wheel, and place it upon its car- 
 riage. No. 1 puts up the sponge, No. 2 the handspike, and No. 3 
 secures the cap squares. 
 
 UNPACKING THE AMMUNITION CHESTS. 
 
 46. The instructor commands : 
 
 1. Prepare to unpach the Chests. 2. Unpack THE Chests. 
 
 At the first command, Nos. 2 and 4 seize the handles of the right 
 chest, and Nos. 1 and 5 those of the left: Nos. 4 and 5 having first 
 unbuckled the lashing straps, and detached the lashing rope. 
 
 At the second command, they raise the chests, unhook them, and 
 lay them on the ground one yard from the mule. 
 
 UNPACKING THE MULES AT ONE COMMAND. 
 
 47. The instructor commands : 
 
 Uwpach the onules. 
 
 At this command, the drivers place the shaft and carriage mules 
 eight yards apart, the crupper towards the place the piece is to oc- 
 cupy; the gunner, and Nos. 4 and 5 proceed to unpack the car- 
 riage, and Nos. 1, 2, and 3 the piece. The sponge and handspike 
 are not taken from the carriage until it is on the ground, nor is the 
 piece taken from the saddle until the carriage is mounted on its 
 wheels. Each cannoneer performs his duty as directed in Nos. 44 
 and 45. 
 
 If the ammunition chests are to be unpacked, it is done as soon 
 as the piece is mounted, as prescribed in No. 46. 
 
CHAPTER IV. 
 
 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY- 
 
 SERVICE or THE PIECE. 
 
 1. The manner of serving heavy artillery varies with the kind of 
 piece, and the carriage upon which it is mounted. 
 
 2. There are four kinds of heavy pieces in the land service, viz. : 
 the Gun, the Howitzer, the Mortar, and the Columbiad. 
 
 They are distinguished according to their use, as siege, garrison, 
 and sea-coast artillery. 
 
 For their service six distinct kinds of carriages dre necessary, 
 viz. : the siege^ the harhette, the casemate, the fiank-casemate, the 
 columbiad, and the carriage upon which the Mortar is mounted, 
 which' is technically called its bed. 
 
 Siege art illert/ ia used in the attack of places ; and as it follows 
 armies in their operations, is mounted upon carriages which serve 
 for its transportation. 
 
 Garrison artillery is employed in the defence of forts, more es- 
 pecially those of the interior; and sea-coast artillery, consisting of 
 the heaviest calibres, is used for the defence of the sea-coast. Their, 
 carriages do not subserve the purpose of transportation; the bar- 
 bette carriage may, however, be used for moving its piece for short 
 distances, as from one front of a work to another. 
 
66 
 
 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 The following are the kinds and calibres of Heavy Artillery 
 used in the land service of the United States: 
 
 Kind of Ordnance. 
 
 1 
 
 j Siege and Garrison. < 
 
 Sea-coast. < 
 
 owiTZERS. I Siege and Garrison. < 
 
 Guns. 
 
 H 
 
 CoLUMBiADS. y Sea-coast. 
 
 Mortars. 
 
 Siege. 
 
 Sea-coast. 
 
 Stone. 
 Coeliorn. 
 
 CaUbre, 
 
 12-p(1r. 
 IS-pdr. 
 24-pdr. 
 32-pdr. 
 42-pdr. 
 
 8-inch. 
 24-pdr. 
 
 8-inch. 
 10-inch. 
 
 SScii. 
 10-inch. 
 
 8-inch. 
 lO-inch. 
 10-inch. 
 ] 3-inch. 
 16-inch. 
 24-pdr. 
 
 Material. 
 
 \- Iron. 
 
 I Bronze 
 
 3. The detachment for serving a piece is formed in two ranks, 
 and numbered from right to left. The odd numbers from the rear 
 rank, and serve on the right of the piece; the even numbers and 
 the gunner form the front rank, and serve on its left. The right 
 file is numbered 1 and 2; the next file 3 and 4; the gunner is un- 
 covered, and generally on the left of No. 4; and on his left nre as 
 many files as are deemed necessary, numbered 5 and 6, 7 and 8, etc. 
 
 4. A piece is in battery when it is in the proper position to be 
 fired. 
 
 The right of a piece, when in battery, is the right of the can- 
 noneer when facing to the object to be fired at; the front is the di- 
 rection towards which the muzzle points. 
 
 The term battery is applied to one or more pieces, or to the places 
 where the pieces are fired. 
 
 A jjlatform is the support upon which a piece is manoeuvred 
 when in battery. 
 
 5. The detachment is marched to the battery by a flank. It is 
 halted, and faced to the iront, when its centre is opposite to the 
 middle of the platform, and (if there be room) four yards from it. 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 67 
 
 6. To cause tlie cannoneers to take their posts, the instructor 
 commands: 
 
 1. Detachment, to your posts. 2. March. 
 
 At the first command, the detachment is faced to the right hy the 
 chief of piece. 
 
 At the second command, it files to the left, and the two flanks 
 separate ; the rear rank marching to the right of the piece, and the 
 front rank to the left, in lines parallel to its axis. As each man ar- 
 rives at his post, he halts and faces to the piece; Nos. 1 and 2 one 
 yard from the epaulment, parapet, or scarp, their breasts eighteen 
 inches outside of the wheels of the carriage or cheeks of the mor- 
 tar bed, as the case may be; and the other numbers and the 
 gunner, dressing on Nos. 1 and 2 respectively at intervals of one 
 yard, except that between Nos. 3 and 5 there is an interval of two 
 yards. With the mortar, Nos. 1 and 2 are opposite to the front ma- 
 noeuvring bolts, and Nos. 3 and 4 opposite to those in the rear. 
 
 Under the Jire of the enemy, the men will be directed to cover 
 themselves by the parapet as much as may be consistent with the 
 execution of their duties. 
 
 7. Tlie chief of inece (a non-commissioned officer) assists the in- 
 structor in efiecting a correct execution of the movements. While 
 at the battery, he will generally be one yard outside of the can- 
 noneers of the left, facing the piece, and two yards in rear of the 
 platform or rearmost part of the carriage. He communicates and 
 attends to the execution of all orders he may receive in relation to 
 the service of his piece; as, for instance, the kind of ammunition 
 t<|^|?e used, the weight of charge, the kind and length of fuze, etc. 
 
 o. The movements of the cannoneers at the battery are in douhle 
 quick time. 
 
 0. Posts are changed at the discretion of the instructor. 
 
 10. To allow the detachment to rest, the instructor commands: 
 
 In place. Rest; or, Kest. 
 
 The cannoneers lay down their handspikes. 
 
 In the first case, the men remain at their posts; in the second 
 case, they may leave their posts, but will remain near the piece. 
 To resume the exercise, the instructor commands: 
 
 Attention — Detachment. 
 At which command, all resume their posts and handspikes. 
 
68 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 11. Until the cannoneer becomes well versed in his duties at the 
 piece, the instructor will himself, by way ot example, occasionally 
 execute the movements which he orders. In the intervals of rest 
 he will minutely instruct the men in the names and uses of the im- 
 plements, and in the nomenclatures of the piece, its carriage or bed, 
 and of the parts of the fbrtification near the battery. In the course 
 of the instruction, he will require every man to point out and de- 
 signate by name all the parts enumerated in these nomenclatures, 
 and to answer questions relative to the service of the piece; such 
 as the weight of. charge, the manner of making cartridges and wads, 
 of heating shot and throwing hot shot, of laying platforms, f)oint- 
 ing, etc. And although he is to consider precision of movement as 
 highly essential, yet he is to inculcate that something more is neces- 
 sary than a merely mechanical performance of duty. He will, 
 therefore, endeavor to impress upon the cannoneer not only the 
 habit of a soldier-like manner of working his gun, but an accurate 
 understanding of all the elements necessary to the efficiency of its 
 fire. 
 
 12. To leave the battery, the instructor commands: 
 
 1. Detachment, rear. 2. March. 
 
 At the first command, the detachment is faced from the epaul- 
 ment by the chief of piece. 
 
 At the second command, it marches to the rear — the cannoneers 
 of the left closing upon those of the right — files to the right, and 
 is halted and faced to the front by the chief of piece, so as to bring 
 its centre opposite to the middle of the platform, and four yards 
 from it. The chief of piece places himself upon the right. 
 
 The detachment is marched from the battery by a flank. 
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 Service of a Gun mounted on a siege carriage. 
 
 Seven men are necessary; one gunner and six other cannoneers. 
 13. The piece is in battery upon its platform. 
 The implements; etc., are arrarrged as follows: 
 
 r Three on each side of the carriage leaning 
 Handspikes, . I against the epaulment, in line with the 
 
 (^ cannoneers. 
 
to 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 p- 
 
 i-j 
 O 
 
 P 
 
 ►— ' • 
 
 OfQ 
 
 O 
 
 Page 68. 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 69 
 
 Sponge Rammer, 
 
 Pass-box, 
 
 Tube-pouch, 
 
 Gunner's-pouch, 
 
 Chocks, . . , 
 Vent-cover, , 
 
 TOMPION, . . 
 
 Broom, . . . 
 
 { 
 
 One yard behind and parallel to the line of 
 cannoneers of the right, the sponge upper- 
 most, the sponge and rammer-heads turned 
 from the epaulment, and supported upon a 
 prop. 
 Against the epaulment, outside of the pile of 
 
 balls. ^ 
 
 Containing friction tubes, and the lanyard, 
 which is habitually wound in the form of 
 St. Andrew's cross upon its handle. Sus- 
 pended from the knob of the cascable. 
 Containing the gunner's level, breech sight, 
 fingerstall, priming wire, gimlet, vent-punch 
 and chalk. Suspended from the knob of 
 the cascable. 
 One on each side of the piece, near the ends 
 
 of the hurter. 
 Covering the vent. 
 In the muzzle. 
 I Leaning against the epaulment, outside of 
 I the pile of balls. 
 When several guns are served together, there will be only one 
 gunner's level and two vent-punchers to each battery, not exceeding 
 six pieces. To the same battery there will be one ivorm, one ladle, 
 and one lorench. 
 
 The balls are regularly piled on the left of the piece, near the 
 epaulment, and close to the edge of the platform. 
 
 The wads are placed between the epaulment and the balls, partly 
 resting on them. 
 
 14. The cannoneers having been marched to their posts, the in- 
 structor directs them to plaoe their muskets against the epaulment, 
 and then explains to them the names and uses of the implements, 
 and the nomenclatures of the gun, its carriage and the battery. 
 
 15. To cause the implements to be distributed, the instructor 
 commands: 
 
 Take Impleinents. 
 
 The gunner steps to the knob of the cascable; takes off the vent- 
 cover, handing it to No. 2 to place against the epaulment, outside 
 of the pass-box; gives the tube-pouch to No. 3; equips himself 
 with his own pouch and the fingerstall, wearing the latter on the 
 
70 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLER^^ 
 
 second finger of the left hand; levels the piece by the elevating 
 screw; applies his level to ascertain the highest points of the base- 
 ring and swell of -the muzzle, which he marks with chalk, and re- 
 sumes his post. 
 
 No. 3 equips himself with the tube-pouch. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2, after passing two handspikes each to Nos. 3 and 4, 
 take each one for himself. JS"os. 5 and 6 receives theirs from Nos. 
 3 and 4. 
 
 16. The handspike is held in both hands; the hand nearest to 
 the epaulment grasping it near the small end and at the height of 
 the shoulder, back of the hand down, the arm extended naturally; 
 the butt of the handspike upon the platform on the side farthest 
 from the epaulment, and six inches in advance of the alignment. 
 
 17. When the cannoneer lays down his handspike, he places it 
 directly before fiim, about six inches in advance of and parallel to 
 the alignment, the small end towards the epaulment; and whenever 
 he thus lays it down for the discharge of any particular duty, he 
 will resume it on returning to his post after the completion of 
 that duty. 
 
 18. The instructor causes the service of the piece to be executed 
 by the following commands : 
 
 1. From Battery. 
 
 The gunner moves two paces to his right. 
 
 Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6, facing from the epaulment, unbar; Nos. 
 1 and 2 under the front of the wheels ; Nos. 3 and 4 through the 
 rear spokes of the wheels near the felly, under and perpendicularly 
 to the cheeks; and Nos. 5 and 6 under the manoeuvring bolts. 
 
 All being ready, the gunner gives the command Heave, which 
 will be repeated as often as may be necessary. He sees Nos. 5 and 
 6 guide the trail in prolongation of the directrix of the embrasure, 
 and as soon as the face of the piece is about one yard from the 
 epaulment, commands Halt. All unbar, and resume their posts, 
 Nos. 1 and 2 chock the wheels. 
 
 2. Load hy Detail. Load. 
 
 19. Nos. 1, 2 and 4 lay down their handspikes. 
 
 No. 2 takes out the tompion, and places it near the vent-cover. 
 ]No. 1 faces once and a half to his left; steps over the sponge and 
 rammer ; faces to the piece ; takes the sponge with both hands, the 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILL:ERY. 71 
 
 black down, the right hand three feet from the sponge head, the 
 left hand eighteen inches nearer to it, returns to the piece, entering 
 the staff in the embrasure; places the left foot in line with the face 
 of the piece, half way between it and the wheels; breaks to the 
 right with the right foot, the heels on a line parallel to the direction 
 of the piece, the left leg straightened, the right knee bent, the 
 body erect upon the haunches ; and rests the end of the sponge in 
 the muzzle, the staff in the prolongation of the bore, supported by 
 the right hand, the right arm extended, the left hand flat against 
 the side of the thigh. 
 
 No. 3 steps to the muzzle, and occupies a position on'the left of 
 the piece corresponding to that of No. 1 on its right. He seizes the 
 staff with the left hand, back down, near to and outside of the hand 
 ofNo. 1. 
 
 No. 2, facing towards the epaulment, embars under the -breech, 
 and maintains the piece in a convenient position for inserting the 
 sponge, until he receives a signal from'thc gunner to unbar. He 
 then lays down his handspike; steps over the rammer, and seizes the 
 staff witli both hands, as prescribed for the sponge ; and stands ready 
 to exchange with No. 1. 
 
 No. 4 takes the pass-box and goes to the rear for a cartridge; re- 
 turns with it, and places himself, facing the piece, about eighteen 
 inches to the rear and right of No. 2. 
 
 The gunr.er places himself near the stock, the left foot advanced, 
 closes the vent with the second finirer of the left band, bendino: well 
 forward to cover himself by the breech; turns the elevating screw 
 with the right hand, so as to adjust the piece conveniently for load- 
 ing : and makes a signal for No. 3 to unbar. 
 
 20. In the mean time Nos. 1 and 2 insert the sponge by the fol- 
 lowing motions : 
 
 First motion. — They insert the spongd as far as the hand of No. 
 1, bodies erect, shoulders square. 
 
 Second motion. — They slide the hand along' the staff, and seize it 
 at arm's length. 
 
 TMrd motion. — They force the sponge down as prescribed in the 
 first motion. 
 
 Fourth motion. — They repeat the second motion. 
 
 Fifth motion. — They push the sponge to the bottom of the bore. 
 No. 1. replaces the left hand on the staff, back up, six inches nearer 
 to the muzzle than the right. No. 2 places the right hand, back 
 Up, between the hands of No. 1. 
 
 If in executing these motions, or the corresponding ones with the 
 
72 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 rammer, it be found that the sponge or rammer is at home at the 
 third or fourth motion, then what is prescribed for the fifth motion 
 will be performed at the third or fourth. The knee on the side to- 
 wards which the body is to be inclined is always bent, the other 
 straightened; and the weight of the body added, as much as possi- 
 ble, to the eflFort exerted by the arms. 
 
 3. Sponge. 
 
 21. Nos. 1 and 2, pressing the sponge firmly against the bottom 
 of the bor^, turn it three times from right to left, and three times 
 from left to right; replace the hands on the thighs; and withdraw 
 the sponge by motions contrary to those prescribed for inserting it. 
 
 Remark. — To handle the sponge when it is new and fits tight, it maybe- 
 come necessary for Nos. 1 and 2 to use both hands. In this case it will be 
 inserted and withdrawn by short and quick motions. 
 
 INo. 2 quits the stafi", and turning towards No. 4, receives from 
 him the cartridge, which he takes in both hands, back down, and 
 introduces into the bore bottom foremost, seams to the sides ; he then 
 grasps the rammer in the way prescribed for the sponge. 
 
 No. 1, rising upon the right leg and turning towards his left, 
 passes the sponge above the rammer with the left hand to No. 3, 
 and receiving the rammer with the right, presents it as prescribed 
 for the sponge, except that he rests the rammer-head against the 
 right side of the face of the piece. 
 
 No. 3, as soon as the sponge is withdrawn, passing the rammer 
 under the sponge into the embrasure with the right hand, receives 
 the sponge from No. 1 with the left, replaces it upon the prop, and 
 resumes his post. 
 
 No. 4, setting down the pass-box, takes out the ^cartridge and 
 presents it in both hands to No. 2, the choke to the front , returns 
 the pass-box to its place, and picks up a ball, and afterwards a wad, 
 should one be required. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2 force down the cartridge by the motions prescribed 
 for forcing down the sponge. 
 
 4. Kam. 
 
 22. Nos. 1 and 2, drawing the rammer out to the full extent of 
 their arms, ram with a single stroke. No. 2 quits the staiSf, and 
 turning towards No. 4, receives from him the ball and wad, whilst 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 73 
 
 No. 1 throws out the rammer, and holds the head against the right 
 side bf^e face of the piece. No. 2, receiving successively the ball 
 and wal, introduces them into the bore, the ball first, and seizes the 
 staff with the left hand. No. 4 then resumes his post. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2 force down the ball and wad together by the same 
 motions, and ram in the same manner as prescribed for the car- 
 tridge. No. 2 quits the rammer; sweeps, if necessary, the platform 
 on his own side; passes the broom to No. 1 ; and resumes his post. 
 No. 1 throws out the rammer, and places it upon the prop below the 
 sponge; finishes the sweeping, and resumes his post. 
 
 The gunner pricks, leaving the priming wire in the vent; re- 
 sumes his post; and, if firing beyond point-blank range, adjusts the 
 breech-sight to the distance. 
 
 5. In Battery. 
 
 23. Nos. 1 and 2 unchock the wheels, and with Nos. 3, 4, 6, and 
 6, all facing towards the epaulment, embar ; Nos. 1 and 2 through 
 the front spokes of the wheels near the felly, under and perpen- 
 dicularly to the cheeks; Nos. 3 and 4 under the rear of the wheels; 
 and Nos. 5 and 6 under the manoeuvring bolts perpendicularly to the 
 stock. 
 
 All being ready, the gunner commands Heave, and the piece is 
 run into battery ; Nos. 5 and 6 being careful to guide the chase 
 into the middle of the embrasure. . As soon as the wheels touch the 
 hurter, he commands Halt. All unbar, and Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4. 
 resume their posts. 
 
 6. Point. 
 
 24. No. 3 lays down his handspike, passes the hook of the lan- 
 yard through the eye of a tube from front to rear, and holds the 
 handle of the lanyard with the right hand, the hook between the 
 thumb and forefinger. 
 
 Nos. 5 and 6 embar under and perpendicularly to the trail, near 
 the manoeuvrinii; bolts. 
 
 The gunner, placing himself at the stock, as at the command 
 Load, withdraws the priming- wire, and, aided by Nos. 5 and 6, 
 gives the direction, causing the trail to be moved by commanding 
 Left, or Right, tapping at the same time on the right side of tho 
 breech for No. 5 to move the trail to the left, or on the left side for 
 No. 6 to move it to the right. 
 
 4 
 
74 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 He then places the centre point of the breech-sight accurately 
 upon the chalk mark on the base-ring, and by the elevating ^rew 
 gives the proper elevation, rectifying the direction, if necessary. 
 
 The moment the piece is correctly pointed, he rises on the left 
 leg, and gives the word Ready, making a signal with both hands, at 
 which Nos. 5 and 6 unbar, and resume their posts; takes the breech- 
 sight with the left hand, and goes to the windward to observe the 
 effect of the shot. 
 
 No. 3 inserts the tube in the vent, drops the handle, allowing the 
 lanyard to uncoil as he steps back to his post, holding it slightly 
 stretched with the right hand, the cord passing between the fingers, 
 back of the hand up; and breaks to the rear a full pace with the 
 left foot, the left hand against the thigh. 
 
 At the word Eeady, Nos. 1 and 2 take the chocks, and breaking 
 off with the feet furthest from the epaulment, stand ready to chock 
 the wheels. 
 
 25. In directing the piece to be fired, the instructor will designate 
 it by its number, as, for example : 
 
 7. Numher one — FiRE. 
 
 No. 3 gives a smart pull upon the lanyard. 
 
 Immediately afcer the discharge of the piece, Nos. 1 and 2 chock 
 the wheels, and resume the erect position. No. 3 resumes the erect 
 position, and rewinds the lanyard in St. Andrew's cross upon its 
 handle, returning it if dry to the tube-pouch. The gunner, having 
 observed the effect of the shot, returns to his post. 
 
 26. Whenever the piece is to be fired by d^ lock, port-fire, or sloiv- 
 mafrh, it will be done by No. 3, as prescribed for No. 4, in the in- 
 
 • struction fur field artillery. 
 
 27. To continue the exercise^ the instructor resumes the series of 
 commmds, beginning with From Battery. 
 
 TO change posts. 
 
 28. To change posts the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Change Posts. 2. March. 3. Call Off. 
 
 At the first command, the cannoneers lay down their handspikes; 
 place their equipments on the parts of the carriage nearest to them; 
 and face to their left. 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 75 
 
 At the second command, they step off, each advancing one postj 
 No. € taking that of No. 1. Nos. 2 and 5 pass to the rear of the 
 trail ; No. 2 on the outside of all the cannonetrs, Oi> arriving at 
 their posts, they face to the piece, and equip themselves. 
 
 At the third command; they call off, according to the pOsts they 
 are to occupy. 
 
 TO LOAD FOR ACTION. 
 
 29. The cannoneers having been sufficiently instructed in the 
 details of the movements, the instructor commands : 
 
 * Load for action — LoAD. 
 
 The piece is run from battery, loaded, run into battery, pointed, 
 and prepared for firing, by the following commands from the gunner : 
 From Battery — Load — In Battery — Point — Ready. 
 
 At the command or signal from the instructor to commence firing, 
 the gunner gives the command Fire, and continues the action until 
 the instructor directs the firing to cease. 
 
 to cease firing. 
 
 30. To cause the firing to cease, the instructor commands : 
 
 Cease Firing. 
 
 Whether the cannoneers are loadinp l^ detail or for action, the 
 piece is sponged out, and all resume their posts. If the cartridge 
 has been inserted, the loading will be completed, unless the instruc- 
 tor should otherwise direct. 
 
 to secure piece, and replace implements. 
 
 31. To discontinue the exercise, the instructor having ordered the 
 firing to cease, and caused the piece to be run into battery, gives 
 the following commands : 
 
 1. Secure Piece. 
 
 No. 2 returns the tompion to the muzzle, the gunner puts on the 
 vent-cover, which he receives from No. 2, and depresses the piece. 
 
76 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 ^R^ 2. Replace Implements. • 
 
 No3. 1 and 2 replactfe the handspikes against the epaulment, those 
 of Nos. 3, 4, 5 and G being passed to them by Nos. o and 4 for that 
 purpose. The gunner -hangs the pouches upon the knob of the 
 cascable. 
 
 TO LEAVE THE BATTERY. 
 
 ' 32. The instructor causes the muskets to be taken; forms the 
 detachment in rear of the piece; and marches it from the battery as 
 prescribed in No. 12. • 
 
 33. Remarhs. — The service of a 24 pdr. siege gun, as it respects 
 running from and to battery, and pointing, is performed by five 
 men, as prescribed for the siege howitzer, li'ive men suffice for the 
 service of the 18 and 12 pdrs. To perform, however, all the duties 
 incident to a battery of heavy artillery on a war establishment, inclu- 
 ding transportation and the mechanical manoeuvres, the details for 
 its daily service, at three reliefS; should allow at least twenty pri- 
 vates to each piece. 
 
 TO SERVE THE PIECE WITH REi)UCED NUMBERS. 
 
 34. The smallest number of men with which heavy pieces can 
 be served with facility, has been given as five. It may be necessa- 
 ry, however, from the men being disabled, or from other circum- 
 stances, to serve a gun with a less number. 
 
 With four men. — They will be told off as gunner, and Nos. 1, 2, 
 and 8. In this case No. 2 will; in addition to his own duties, per- 
 form those of No. 4. 
 
 With three men. — They will be told off as gunner, and Nos. 1 
 and 2. No. 1 performs the duties prescribed for No. 3, as well as 
 his own. No. 2 performs those of No. 4, as in the preceding case. 
 
 When No. 2 serves ammunition, he goes for the cartridge, and 
 places the pass-box behind his post, before assisting No. 1 to 
 sponge. 
 
 * TRANSPORTATION. 
 
 35. The transportation of a 24-pounder gun requires ten horses 
 and five drivers; an 18-pounder eight horses and four drivers; a 
 
« 
 MANUAL FUU HEAVY ARTILLERY. 77 
 
 battery wagon six horses and three drivers; and spare carriages — 
 at the rate of one for every five pieces require each six hor&es and 
 three drivers. 
 
 CIl ARCHES, ETC. 
 
 36. Tlic ordinary service charge of powder for lieavy guns is 
 one-fourth the weight of the shot. . For firing double sliot it is one- 
 sixth that weight. The breaching charge is one-third the weight of 
 the sliot. 
 
 Range of a 24 pth-., at an angle of 1° 30'', (point blank), 
 
 charge ^Ibs., . _ . . . 050 yards. 
 
 Range of a 24-p(lr., at an aniile of ■)°, charge 6 fts.. - lOoO ' " 
 
 Range of an IS-pdr., at an aniile of 1° 30^, charge 4^ 16?., 800 " 
 
 Range of an IS-jjdr., at an angle of 5°, cliarge 4^ lbs., - KIIJO 
 
 Proof range of powder, . . - - . 300 " 
 The range of a r2.pdr. is about the same as that of an 
 
 18-pdr. ' 
 
 Greatest elevation that a 24-pdr. carringe admr"ts, - 12° 
 
 Greatest elevation that an i8-pdr. carnage admits, - 12* 
 
 Greatest elevation that a r2-pdr. carriage admits, - 13° 
 
 Greatest depression that a 24-pdr. carriage admits, - 4° 
 
 Greatest depression that an 18-pdr. carriage admits, - 4° 
 
 Greatest depression that a 12-pdr. carriage admits, - 4° 
 
 WADS. 
 
 37. Wach are not generally necessary, except when firing at 
 angles of depression • and then only one is used, and that on the 
 ball. When, however, the piece has been fired so often that the 
 ball has caused a lodtpnent in the bore, it is well to use wads differ- 
 ing in length, according to the position and extent of the lodgment, 
 between the shot and the cartridge. 
 
 Ilai/ wads may be made by twisting hay into a rope of about one 
 inch in diameter, folding it together of any desired length, and 
 then winding the folds from one end to the other, leaving the wad 
 a little larger that the bore. 
 
 BREACniNG BATTERIES. 
 
 88. Breaching hatieries established against walls are: 
 Fir^f. Tq make a horizontal section the length of the desired 
 breach along the scarj), at one-third its height from the bottom of* 
 the ditch, and to a depth equal to the thickness of the wall. 
 
78 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 SeconrVi/. To mako vertical cuts throueh the wall, not further 
 than ten yards apart, and not exceeding one to each piece; b(\uin- 
 ning at the liorizontal section, and ascending gradually to the top of 
 the wall. 
 
 Thirdly. To fire at the most prominent pofnts of the masonry 
 left standing; beginning always at the bottom, and gradually ap- 
 proaching to the top. 
 
 Fourthh/. To fire into the broken mass with howitzers until the 
 breach is practicable. 
 
 Breaches of more than twenty yards in length have been opened 
 by way of experiment, and rendered practicable, in less than ten 
 hours, by about two hundred and thirty 24-pdr. balls and forty 
 shells in one case^ and by three hundred 18-pdr. balls and forty 
 shells in another. 
 
 RAPIDITY OF riRING. 
 
 89. Iron guns sustain long-continued and rapid firing better than 
 brass guns. A'iron gun should sustain twelve hundred discharges, 
 at the rate of twelve an hour; but whatever may be the rate of tire, 
 it is deemed unsafe after that number of discharges. As many as 
 twenty an hour have been made for sixteen consecutive hours. 
 
 PENETRATION OF SHOT. 
 
 40. The penetration of balls increases to a certain extent with 
 their calibre. The mean result, from several experiments, gives the 
 penetration of a 24-pdr. ball, with the charge of one-third its 
 weight, at the distance of one hundred yards, as follows: 
 
 Feet. Inches. 
 Ill earth of old^parapets, - - - 8 6 
 
 In earth recently thrown up, - - - 15 
 
 In oak wood, sound and hard, - - .40 
 
 In rubble stone and masonry, - - - 1 10 
 
 In brick, - - - - - 3 
 
 LESSON II. 
 
 Service of an %-inch Siege Howitzer, mounted on a 2.\-pdr. Siege 
 
 Carriage. 
 
 Five men are necessary: one gunner and four other cannoneers. 
 41. The piece is in battery upon its platform. 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 79 
 
 The implements, ect, are arranged as follows: 
 
 C Three on the left of the carriage, and two on 
 Handspikes, - < the right, leaning against the epaulment, in 
 (^ line with the cannoneers. 
 r On props, eighteen inches behind and parallel 
 -| to the cannoneers of the right, the sponge- 
 (^ head turned towards the epaulment. 
 ( Containing fuzes, a pair of sleeves, and a 
 priming-wire, bent at right angles at the 
 
 Sponge & .Rammer, 
 
 Haversack, 
 
 Tube-pouch, 
 
 gunners'-pouch, 
 
 loading-tongs, 
 Quadrant, - - 
 Plummet, - - 
 Scraper, - - 
 Wiper, - - - 
 Splints, - - - 
 Grummet-wad, 
 
 Chocks, - - - 
 
 Vent-cover, 
 Tompion, - - 
 Quoin, - - - 
 
 Broom, - - - 
 
 < 
 
 point for withdrawing the cartridge used in 
 I instruction. Suspended from the knob of 
 l^ the cascable. 
 
 ( Containing friction tubes, and the .lanyard, 
 wound in St. Andrew's cross upon its 
 handle. Suspended from the knob of the 
 cascable. 
 
 { Containing the gunner's level breech-sight, 
 j finger-stall, priming-wire, gimlet, vent- 
 punch, and chalk. Suspended from the 
 knob of the cascable. 
 
 I In a basket or on a shelf, against the epaul- 
 -J ment, outside of and near the handspikes 
 I of the left. 
 
 I 
 On the end of the hurter, near No. 2. 
 
 f One on each side of the piece, near the ends 
 
 i of the hurter. 
 
 Covering the vent. 
 
 Tn the muzzle. 
 Under the breech. 
 J Leaning against the epaulment, outside of the 
 ( basket or shelf. 
 When several howitzers are served together, there will be only 
 one gunner's level and two vent-punches to each battery, not ex- 
 ceeding six pieces. To the same battery there will be one wrench. 
 One shell and one bombazine cartridge bag for instruction — the 
 bag filled with sawdust, and having loops of thread at the choke 
 end — arc at the magazine, or other safe place in rear of the piece. 
 42. The cannoneers having been marched to their posts, the in- 
 structor directs them to place their muskets against the epaulment, 
 
80 MANUAL FOR UEAVY ARTILLBKY. 
 
 and then explains to tliem the names and uses of the implements, 
 und the nomenclatures of the howitzer, its carriage, and the bat- 
 tery. 
 
 43. To cause the implements to be distributed, the instructor 
 commands : 
 
 Take Implements. 
 
 The p;unner steps to the knob of the cascable; takes off the vent- 
 cover, handing it to No. 2 to place against the epaulment, outside 
 of the basket^ gives the tube-pouch t'6 No. 8, and tho haversack to 
 No. 4"; and equips himself with liis own pouch and the finger-stall, 
 wearing the latter on the second finger of the left hand. 
 
 No. 2 puts on the sleeves. 
 
 No. 3 equips himself with the tube-pouch. 
 
 No. 4 equips himself with the haversack, which he wears from 
 the right shoulder to the left side ; takes out the sleeves ; and as- 
 sists No. 2 to put theni,on. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2, after passing handspikes to Nos. 3 and 4 and the 
 gunner, take each one for himself. The gunner, receiving his from 
 No. 4, lays it^in the allignment, the small end towards the epaul- 
 ment, and two yards to his right. The other handspkes arc held, 
 laid down, and resumed, as prescribed in Nos. 15 and IG. 
 
 The gunner directs No. 8 to raise the breech to enable him to 
 level the piece ; applies his level to ascertain the highest points of 
 the base-ring and muzzle-band, wliich he marks- with chalk; and re- 
 sumes his post. 
 
 44. The instructor causes the service of ihe piece to be executed 
 by the following commands : 
 
 1. From Battery. 
 
 The gunner moves two paces to his right. 
 
 Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4, facing from the epaulment, embar : Nos. 1. 
 and 2 through the rear spokes of the wheels, near the felly, under 
 and perpendicularly to the cheeks; and Nos. 3 and 4 under the 
 manoeuvring bolts. 
 
 All being ready, the gunner gives the command Heave, which 
 will be repeated as often as may be necessary. He sees that Nos. 3 
 and 4 guide the trail in prolongation of the directrix of the em- 
 brasure, and as soon as the wheels are about one yard from the 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY AETILLERY. 81 
 
 cpaulraent, commands Halt. All imbar^ and resume their posts. 
 Nos. 1 and 2 chock the wheels. 
 
 2. Load hy detail — Load. 
 
 45. Nos. 1, 2, and 4, lay down their handspikes. 
 
 No. 2 takes but the tompion, and places it near the vent-cover; 
 sweeps, if necessar}^, his side of the platform ; passes the broom to 
 the right side of the piece; and resumes his post. 
 
 No. 1 faces to his right, and seizes the sponge-staff at its middle 
 with the right hand, back up; places himself at the muzzle; 
 forces the sponge to the bottom of the chamber; and grasps the 
 staff with both hands : all nearly as in field artillery. 
 
 No. 3, facing towards the epaulment, embars under the breech or 
 knob of the cascable, until he receives a signal from the gunner to 
 unbar, when he resumes his post. 
 
 No. 4 goes to the rear for a cartridge and shell ; puts the cart- 
 ridge in his haversack; takes the shell in both hands; returns and 
 places it on the grummet-wad ; and stands, facing the piece, about 
 eighteen inches to the rear and left of No. 2. 
 
 The gunner places himself near the stock, as in No. 18, and 
 closes the vent with the second finger of the left hand; adjusts the 
 piece with the quoin to about one degree's elevation; and makes a 
 sign for No. 3 to unbar. . 
 
 3. Sponge. 
 
 46. No. 1, pressing the sponge firmly against the bottom of the 
 chamber, turns it three times from right to left, and three times 
 from left to right; draws it out to the front of the ehamber : wipes 
 out the bore ; reinserts the sponge along the upper side of the bore 
 as far as the chamber ; draws it entirely out, pressing it upon the 
 lower side of the bore; turns the sponge over towards the embra- 
 sure; and presents the rammer-head against the right side of the 
 face of the piece, holding' the staff in both hands. 
 
 No. 2, as soon as the sponging is completed, takes the tongs and 
 occupies a position at the muzzle corresponding to that prescribed 
 for No. 1 on the right ; turns to his left on the right heel, advanc- 
 ing the left foot, and prc;>cnts the tongs in both hands, the left hand 
 nearest him, the tongs opened, their legs in the same vertical plane. 
 
 No. 4 takes out the cartridge and inserts it as far as its middle 
 in the tongs, choke foremost, the seam downwards; removes the 
 
82 MANUAL rOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 stopper from, and inserts the fuze into, the fuze plug; scrapes its 
 end ; and takes the wiper. 
 
 No. 2, having received the cartridge in the tongs, makes a face 
 and a half to his right mi the right heel, and breaks off with the 
 left foot; places the right hand against the head of the left cheek 
 of the carriage, and with the left hand introduces the cartridge into 
 the chamber, keeping the legs of the tongs in a vertical plane; 
 then slightly withdrawing and closing the tongs, he presses them in 
 the direction of the axis of the piece against the end of the cart- 
 ridge, and shoves it home. Withdrawing the tongs, he makes a ■ 
 face and a half to his left on the right heel, and puts the hooks 
 of the tongs into the ears of the shell, which he lifts and holds 
 about two feet from the ground, whilst No. 4 wipes it. 
 
 No. 1, as soon as the tongs are withdrawn, inserts the rammer, 
 and holds it with the head against the cartridge, the staff in the 
 axis of the piece. 
 
 4. Ram. 
 
 47. No. 1 presses firmly upon the cartridge; throws out the ram- 
 mer, and places it upon the props; sweeps, if necessary, his side of 
 the platform; passes the broom to the left side of the piece; and 
 resumes his post. 
 
 No. 2 introduces the shell, and shoves it home in a manner simi- 
 lar to that prescribed for the cartridge ; withdraws the hooks, and 
 looks to see that the fuze is in the axis of the piece. 
 
 If the piece is to be fired horizontally, or at an angle of depres- 
 sion, No. 4, having replaced the wiper, hands a splint to No. 2, and 
 resumes his post. ^ 
 
 No. 2 presses the splint under the shell with the left hand; re- 
 places the tongs and broom ; and resumes his post. 
 
 The gunner pricks, leaving the priming-wire in the vent, and re- 
 sumes his post. 
 
 5. In Battery. 
 
 48. Nos. 1 and 2 unchock the wheels, and with Nos. 3 and 4, all 
 facing towards the epaulment, erabar : Nos. 1 and 2 through the 
 front spokes of the wheels, near the felly, under and perpendicular- 
 ly to the cheeks; and Ncs. 3 and 4 under the rear of the wheels. 
 
 The gunner, seizing his handspike, embars under the manoeuvring 
 bolts ; gives the command Heave ; and guides the piece to the 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 83 
 
 middle of the embrasure ; as soon as the wheels touch the hurter, 
 he commands Halt. All unbar^ and resume their posts. 
 
 G. Point. 
 
 49. Nos. 1 and 4 embar under and perpendicularly to the trail, 
 near the manceuvring bolts. 
 
 No. 2, facing towards the epaulment, embars under the breech or 
 knob of the cascable. 
 
 No. 3 lays down his handspike ; passes the hook of the lanyard 
 through the eye of a tube from front to rear; and holds the handle 
 of the lanyard with the right hand, the hook between the thumb 
 and forefino;er. 
 
 The gunner, placing himself at the stock, as at the command 
 Load, withdraws the priming-wire, and, aided by Nos. 1 and 4, 
 gives the direction; causing the trail to be moved by commanding 
 Left, or Right, tapping, at the same time on the right side o^ the 
 breech for No. 1 to move the trail to the left, or on the left side of 
 No. 4 to move it to the right. 
 
 He then places the centre point of the breech-sight accurately 
 upon the chalk mark on the base-ring, and commands Lower, or 
 Raise, tapping, at the same time, on the upper side of the knob of 
 the cascable with the left hand, and drawing out the quoin with the 
 right, in order to elevate, or tapping upwards on the lower side, and 
 shoving in the quoin, in order to depress the piece ; rectifying the 
 direction, if necessary. 
 
 If the piece is to be fired point-blank, horizontally, or at an angle 
 of depression, he does not apply the breech-sight. 
 
 If the piece is masked from the object fired at, he places himself 
 astride the stock, or in rear of the trail, and gives the direction by 
 the plummet. 
 
 To give the elevation when the piece is masked, or when the de- 
 sired range is greater than the breech-sight ranges, he applies the 
 quadrant to the upper surface of the lock-piece, making the allow- 
 ance due to its inclination wiib the axis of the piece, which ought 
 to be previously determined. 
 
 The moment the piece is correctly pointed, he rises on the left 
 leg, and gives the word Ready, making a signal with both hands, 
 at which Nos. 1, 2, and 4 unbar, and resume their posts ; takes the 
 breech-sight with the left hand, and goes to the windward to ob- 
 serve the efi"ect of the shot. 
 
 No. 3 inserts the tube in the vent ; drops the handle, allowing 
 
84 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 the lanyard to uncoil as he steps back to his post, holding it slightly 
 stretched with the right hand, the cord passing between the fingers, 
 back of the hand up ; and breaks to the rear a full pace with the 
 left foot, the left hand against the thigh. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2, on resuming their ])osts, break oif with the feet 
 furthest from the epaulment, inclining well to that side in order to 
 avoid the blast. 
 
 7. Number one (or the like) — Fire. 
 
 50. Executed as in No. 25, except that the wheels are not 
 chocked. 
 
 What is prescribed in No. 26 will apply to this piece. 
 
 51. To continue the exercise, the instructor resumes the series of 
 commands, beginning with From Battery. 
 
 TO UNLOAD. 
 
 62. The piece having been run from battery, the instructor di- 
 rects No. 2 to take out the shell and cartridge ; No. 4 carrying them 
 to their place in rear of the piece. No. 3 assists No. 2, by raising 
 the breech until the shell rolls to the muzzle. 
 
 TO SCRAPE THE PIECE. 
 
 53. [n the course of firing, it may become necessary to scrape 
 the piece. To cause "this to be done, the instructor directs the 
 piece to be moved from battery, and then commands : 
 
 Scrape the Piece. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2 lay down their handspikes. 
 
 No. 2 takes the scraper and wiper, giving the latter to No. 1 ; 
 thoroughly scrapes the chamber and bore ; draws out the scrapings 
 with the spoon ; returns the scraper ^o its place, and resumes his 
 post. 
 
 No. 1, enveloping the sponge-head in the wiper, wipes out the 
 bore and returns the wiper to No. 2, who replaces it;"pi|tsthe 
 sponge upon the props, and resumes his post. 
 
 To change j^osts. 
 
 To load for action. 
 
 To cease firing. 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 85 
 
 To secure piece, and replace implements. 
 To leave the hatteri/. 
 
 Executed as in Nos. 28, 29, 31, and 32 ; No. 4 assisting No. 2 to 
 take oiF the sleeves. 
 
 TO SERVE THE PIECE WITH REDUCED NUMBERS. 
 
 Executed as in No. 34. 
 
 TRANSPORTATION. 
 
 54. The transportation of an 8-inch siege howitzer requires eight 
 horses and four drivers. 
 
 55. 
 
 CHARGES, ETC. 
 
 Greatest charge of powder, 
 
 Greatest charge, shell filled with bullets, 
 
 Charge of the shell filled with powder, 
 
 Charge to blow out the fuze, 
 
 Bursting charge of the shell, 
 
 Greatest elevation the carriage admits, 
 
 Greatest depression the carriage admits. 
 
 Range at an angle of 1°, charge 4 lbs., 
 
 Range at an angle of 5°, charge 4 ibs. 
 
 Range at an angle 15°, charge 4 lbs.. 
 
 Proof range of powder, 
 
 Weight of .«hell, ' - 
 
 Weight of the shell filled with bullets, 
 
 The black fuze burns to the inch, 
 
 The red fuze burns to the inch, - 
 
 The green fuze burns to the inch. 
 
 The yellow fuze burns to the inch, 
 
 At 2° elevation, black fuze, full charge" 
 
 At 3° 2.')' '' ' red fuze, "- 
 
 At 4° 2y " green fuze, " 
 
 At 5° 25^ " yellow, " " 
 
 A proper charge for. en^^ding, at the dis 
 a horizontal plane, relief of the epaulment 
 2°. 75, red fuze, is three pounds. 
 
 The 
 burs 
 
 - 4 8)3. 
 
 - 3 lbs. 
 
 - 2 lbs. 9 oz. 
 
 4 oz. 
 
 1 lb. 
 
 - 15° 
 
 - 10° 
 
 - 430 yards. 
 
 - 1150 " 
 
 - 2300 " 
 
 - 300 " 
 
 45 fljs. 
 65 fcs. 
 
 2 lbs. 
 
 3 lbs. 
 
 4 lbs. 
 
 5 lbs. 
 
 ' 500 to 600 yds. 
 shell SOO to 900 yds. 
 ts at ] 900 to 1000 yds. 
 
 ^1000 to 1100 yds. 
 
 tance of 600 yards, on 
 seven feet, elevation 
 
 TO PREPARE AMMUNITION. 
 
 56. If the ammunition for howitzers is to be prepared amd issued 
 by the artillery, two men, numbered 5 and 6, are added to each de- 
 
86 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 tachment for that purpose. They are sent to the magazinOj where 
 they are provided with the following implements and stores : 
 
 1 Set of Powder Measures. 
 
 1 Funnel. 
 
 1 Fuze-malleL 
 
 1 Fuze-setter. 
 
 1 Fuze plug-reamer. 
 
 1 Rasp. 
 
 1 Basket. Containing fuze-plug. 
 
 2 Grummet-wads, or f On which to place the shells while putting 
 2 Holloio -blocks. j in the charge. 
 
 1 Budge-barrel. 
 
 1 Dark Lantern. 
 
 Tow, For stoppers. 
 
 Cartridge bags. Of bombazine. 
 
 Twine. 
 
 Powder. 
 
 Musket bidlets. 
 
 Incen diary composition . 
 
 They first fill and tie a number of cartridges, according to the 
 directions received from the battery, and then prepare a correspond- 
 ing number of shells. 
 
 "To Jill the cartridges. One holds the bag, while the other (by 
 means of the funnel) pours in the powder. The cartridges thus 
 filled are placed upright in a box until tied, when they are trans- 
 ported to the budge-barrel. 
 
 Cartridges of reduced, charges for ricocJiet firing may be made 
 thus : The charge having been poured into the bag, a wad of hay 
 about six inches in length is placed upon it. This wad is made by 
 laying wisps of hay evenly together, so as to form a cylinder nearly 
 of the diameter of the cartridge bag. The wad is tied about an 
 inch from each end, and the ends are cut squarely oft', so as to pre- 
 sent an even surface to the powder. In handling these cartridges, 
 the powder end of the bag should always be kept downwards. 
 
 To prepare the shells. No. 5 places one upon a grummet-wad; 
 cleanses it, if necessary, with a rasp; drives in a fuze-plug until it 
 does not project more than the tenth of an inch; and reams it out 
 with the reamer. No. 6, transferring it to the other grummet- 
 wad, charges it with powder ; puts in a stopper of tow ; marks it 
 with chalk; and places it conveniently for No. 4. 
 
 If the shell is to be loaded with bullets or incendiary composi- 
 tion, it is charged before the fuze-plug is driven. It should contain 
 
MANUAL FOE HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 87 
 
 about about three hundred and twenty bullets and one pound and a 
 quarter of powder. 
 
 If filled only with powder, No. G marks the shell with a cross j if 
 jjith incendiary composition, he makes a circle around the fuze- 
 plug; and if with bullets, he makes two circles on one side. The 
 shells thus differently charged are kept separate. 
 
 LESSON III. 
 
 Service of a \0-mch Siege Mortar. 
 
 Five men are necessary; pne gunner and four other cannoneers. 
 
 57. The mortar is upon its platform. 
 
 The implements, etc., are arranged as follows: 
 
 { Two on each side of the bed against the 
 j che:>-ks, leaning upon the four manoeuvring 
 ■{ bolts, the small ends towards the epaul- 
 I ment, those of the front handspikes even 
 (^ with the front of the cheeks. 
 
 Containing fuzes and a pair of sleeves. At- 
 ■s tached to the tompion, and lying upon the 
 (^ mortar. 
 Containing the priming^wire, friction tubes, 
 and the lanyard, wound in St. Andrew's 
 cross upon its handle. Attached to the 
 tompion, and lying upon the mortar. 
 Containing the gunner's level, gimlet, vent- 
 punch, and chalk. • Attached to the tom- 
 pion,. and lying upon the mortar. 
 
 Handspikes, 
 
 Haversack, 
 
 Tube-pouch, 
 
 Gunner's-pouch, 
 
 ( 
 
 Quadrant, - - 
 
 Plummet, - - 
 Pointing-cord, 
 
 Scraper, -. - 
 
 Wiper, - - - 
 
 Shell-iiooks, - 
 
 Tompion, - - 
 
 Quoin, - - - 
 
 Pointing-stakes, 
 Maul, - - - 
 Broom, - - - 
 
 In a basket between 
 tar bed. 
 
 the cheeks of the mor- 
 
 In the muzzle. 
 
 Under the mortar upon the bolster, its handle 
 to the left. 
 
 With the basket. 
 
88 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 When several mortars are served tooether, there will be only one 
 gunner's level, and two vent-punches to each battery, not exceeding 
 six pieces. To the same battery ^lere will be one hammer-icrench. 
 
 One shell and one paper cartridge bag for instruction, arc at the 
 magazine or other safe place in rear of the piece. 
 
 58. The cannoneers having -been marched to their posts, the in- 
 structor directs them to place their muskets against the epaulment, 
 and explains to them the names and uses of the implements, and 
 the nomenclatures of the mortar, its bed, and the battery. 
 
 59. To cause the pointing-stakes to be established in position, the 
 instructor qommands : 
 
 Plant the Pointing-stakes. 
 
 The gunner, assisted by Nos. 1 and 2, plants the stakes. 
 
 No. 1, having driven the pointing-stakes, drives another stake 
 one yard behind his post for holding the wiper, and replaces the 
 maul near the basket. 
 
 The gunner lays the slack of the pointing-cord at the foot of the 
 epaulment, leaving the plummet at the stake in the rear of the 
 piece. 
 
 All resume their posts. 
 
 60. To cause the implements to be distributed, the instructor 
 commands j 
 
 Take Implements. 
 
 The gunner steps to the front of the piece ; gives to No. 1 the 
 sleeves and the wiper ; to No. IJ the basket and maul ; to No. 3 the 
 tube-pouch and broom; and to No. 4 the haversack; equips himself 
 with the gunner's pouch ; applies his level to ascertain the line of 
 metal, which he marks with chalk ; and resumes his post. 
 
 No. 1 places the wiper upon the stake behind him, and, assisted 
 by No. 3, puts on the sleeves. 
 
 No. 2 removes the tpmpion, which he places with the basket and 
 maul, one yard behind him, and lays the shell-hooks on the ground 
 between himself and the basket. 
 
 No. 3 lays the btoom on the ground behind him, and equips him- 
 self with the tube-pouch. 
 
 No. 4 equips himself with the haversack, which he wears from 
 the right shoulder to the left side. 
 
 All take their handspikes. 
 
MANUAL FOK HEAVY AKTILLKEY. 89 
 
 61. The handspikes ai-e- held as in No. 16. When laid down, 
 they are returned, except in one case, to their places on the ma- 
 noeuvring bolt. ^ 
 
 62. The instructor causes the service of the piece to be executed 
 by the following commands : 
 
 1. In Battery. 
 
 The gunner, making a half-face to his right, steps off, left foot 
 first, and places himself two paces in rear of the platform, facing the 
 piece. 
 
 Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4, facing towards the cpaulment, embar : Nos. 1 
 and 2 under the front mana^uvring bolts, and Nos. 3 and 4 under 
 those in the rear, engaging the butts of their handspikes about three 
 inches. 
 
 All being ready, the gunner gives the command, Heave, which 
 will bo repeated as often as may J3e necessary. As soon as the piece 
 is on the middle of the platform, he commands Halt. All unbar, 
 and resume their posts. 
 
 2. Load hy Detail — Load. 
 
 63. Nos. 1, 3, and 4, lay down their handspikes. 
 
 The gunner taking the scraper, places himself in front of the 
 muzzle, and scrapes the bore and chamber ] draws out the scrapings 
 with the spoon; returns the scraper to the basket, and again places 
 himself at the muzzle, one yard in its front. 
 
 No. 1, turning to his right, takes the wiper with the right hand; 
 faces to his left, and places the left foot near the manoeuvring bolt, 
 the right in front of the muzzle, the left hand upon the face of the 
 piece ; thoroughly wipes out the chamber and bore, and resumes his 
 post. 
 
 No. 3, as soon as the piece is wiped, clears the vent with the 
 priming-wire; sweeps the platform, if necessary, and resumes his 
 post and handspike. « 
 
 • Nos. 2 and 4, facing to their right — No. 2 holding his handspike 
 at the middle under the left arm, butt end foremost, and taking the 
 shell-hooks in the right — go to the rear for a cartridge and shell. 
 "While No. 4 is getting the cartridge, No. 2 inserts the shell-hooks 
 in the ears of the shell, and passes the small end of the handspike 
 through the ring. In carrying the shell they hold the liandspike 
 s.ith their right hands. No. 4 at the small end and in advance of 
 
90 MANUAL FOR HEAVY AKTILLERY. 
 
 No. 2. Passing by the left of the piece^ between the gunner and 
 the muzzle, they rest the shell upon the platform against the middle 
 of the transom. ^^ 
 
 No. 1, placing the wiper upon the handspike, receives the small 
 end of the handspike from No. 4, who gives the cartridge to the 
 gunner. 
 
 The gunner advances the left foot, and places the left hand upon 
 the face of the piece ; introduces the cartridge into the mouth of the 
 chamber with the right hand, and carefully pours in the powder ; 
 returns the cartridge bag to No. 4, and distributes the powder evenly 
 over the bottom of the chamber. In firing with paper fuzes, he re- 
 ceives one from No. 4, and inserts it in the fuze-plug. 
 
 No. 4, returning the cartridge bag to the haversack, takes the 
 wiper. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2 raise the shell and hold it about a foot from the 
 ground, while No. 4 wipes it; they then lift it into the muzzle. 
 
 The gunner steps forward, and with the left hand over the hand- 
 spike, the right hand under and nearer to it, seizes the shell-hooks 
 and assists to lower the shell gently into its place. No. 2 then 
 withdraws his handspike from the ring, and resumes his post. No. 
 1 takes his handspike. The gunner adjusts the shell so that the 
 faze is in the axis of the piece ; throws the shell hooks to their place 
 behind No. 2 ; and, if firing with wooden fuzes, uncaps the fuze. 
 
 No. 4, as soon as he wipes the shell, returns the wiper to its 
 place ; takes the ^lack of the pointing-cord, which he lays over the 
 left manoeuvring bolts, leaving its end at the rear pointing-stake j 
 and resumes his post and handspike. 
 
 3, POINT. 
 
 64. Nos. 1 and 2, facing towards the epaulment, embar upon the 
 bolster, under and perpendicularly to the piece. 
 
 The gunner taking the quadrant from the basket, applies it to the 
 left side of the face of the piece with the left hand, and inserts or 
 draws out the quoin with the right, giving the command Kaise, or 
 Lower, until the piece is at the elevation required — usually 452. 
 Returning the quadrant to the basket — Nos. 1 and 2 at the same 
 time unbarring and resuming their posts — he places himself in rear 
 of the rear pointing-stake, ;ind holding the pointing-cord in the left 
 hand and the plummet in the right, gives the direction ; command- 
 ing Mortar Left, Mortar Eight ; Muzzle Left, Muzzle 
 Eight; Trail Left, Trail Eight, as may be required. 
 
V 
 
 MANUAL EOK REAYY ARTILLEllY, 91 
 
 To throw the mortar to the left. Nos. 2 and 4, facing each 
 other, embar under the manoeuvring boUs. Nos. 1 and 3, facing 
 towards the epaulment, embar under the H(>tcbes near them. Wben 
 all are ready, the gunner gives the command, Heave Steady. 
 The cannoneerb* remain embarred until he gives some other com- 
 mand, or makes the signal to unbar. 
 
 To throw the mortar to the right. Nos. 1 and o embar under, the 
 manoeuvring bolts. Nos. 2 and 4 embar under the notches. 
 
 To throw the muzzle to the left. Nos. 1 and 3, facing towards the 
 epaulment, embar under the front notches ; No. 1 under the inside 
 of the left notch. 
 
 2^0 throw the trail to the left. — Nos. 1 and 3, facing towards the 
 epaulment, embar under the rear notches; No. 3 under the inside of 
 the left notch. 
 
 The muzzle or trail is thrown to the right^ in a similar manner to 
 the preceding, by Nos, 2 and 4. 
 
 The direction having been given, the gunner gives the word, 
 Ready, and makes a signal with both hands; leaves the plummet at 
 the stake; returns the pointing-cord to tlie foot of the epaulment; 
 and goes to the windward to observe the eifect of the shot. 
 
 Nos. 1, 2, and 4, taking their handspikes with them, go four 
 yards in rear of the platform, and face to the front; No. 4 between 
 Nos. 1 and 2, their handspikes held erect by the right side, the right 
 arm extended naturally. 
 
 No. 3 lays down his handspike six inches in his front, parallel to 
 the edge .of the platfom:, and makes ready y, friction tube, as in No. 
 24; advancing the right foot, he puts the tube in the vent; rises on 
 the left leg, and moves three paces to the rear in prolongation of the 
 right cheek; faces to the front; holds the handle of the lanyard 
 with the right hand, the lanyard slightly stretched, the cord passing 
 between the fingers, back of the hand up ; and breaks to the rear a 
 full pace with the left foot, the left hand against the thigh. 
 
 Remark. — To discharge the mortars now in use by means of a 
 friction tube, the lanyard should be passed under a rope attached to 
 and tightly drawn between the rear manoeuvring bolts, or through a 
 loop of rope attached to-the rear right manoeuvring bolt. 
 
 4. Number one (or the like) — Fire. 
 
 65. Executed as in No. 25. 
 
 On the discharge of the piece, all resume their posts except the 
 gunner, who waits tcv observe the effect of the shot. As soon as the 
 shot strikes he resumes his post. 
 
92 MANUAL FOK HEAVY ARTILLERY. , 
 
 What is prescribed in No. 2G "will apply to this piece, omitting 
 the word ''lock:' 
 
 66. To continue the cri:ercise,,the instructor causes the piece to 
 be moved towards the rear of the phxtlbrm, directs Nos. 2 and 4 to 
 take out the shell and carry 'it to the rear, and then resumes the 
 series of commands beginning with In Battery. 
 
 TO CHANGE TOSTS. TO LOAD FOR ACTION. TO CEASE FIRING. 
 
 Executed as in Nos. 28, 29, .'ind 30, except that in changing posts 
 No. 2 passes by the front of the piece. 
 
 TO SECURE PIECE, AND REPLACE IMPLEMENTS. 
 
 67. To discontinue the exercise, the instructor having ordered 
 the firing to cease, and caused the piece to be placed as at the com- 
 mand, In Battery, gives the command : 
 
 Replace Implements. 
 
 All lay down their handspikes. No. 2 puts in the»tompion, and 
 assists No. 1 to pull up the pointing-stakes. The gunner receives 
 the implements from the cannoneers, and replaces them between the 
 cheeks. 
 
 TO leave the battery. 
 Executed as in No. S;^. 
 
 transportation. 
 
 68. One mortar wagon is allowed to each 10-inch siege mortar 
 and bed ; to transport which requires eight horses and four drivers. 
 
 charges, etc. 
 69. 
 
 Greatest cliarge of powder, 
 
 Ordinary service charge, ' - 
 
 Ciiarge of tlie shell filled with powder - 
 
 Bursting cliarge of the shell, - . - - 
 
 Charge to blow out the fuse, - - - - 
 
 Range, charge 4 lbs., time of flight 21''^, 
 
 Range, charge 3 lbs., time of flight 19^^, 
 
 Range, charge 2 lbs., time of flight 14^'', 
 
 Proof range of powder, - - - * 
 
 Weight of the shell. ... - 
 
 . 
 
 4 
 
 lbs. 
 
 
 3 
 
 (( 
 
 
 5 
 
 i( 
 
 
 2 
 
 u 
 
 
 5 
 
 07.. 
 
 
 2100 
 
 yards 
 
 
 1700 
 
 IC 
 
 . 
 
 1000 
 
 (< 
 
 - 
 
 300 
 
 « 
 
 . 
 
 90 lbs. 
 


 c ;:: 
 
 
 
 
 c o 
 
 
 5= '^ 
 
 
 
 
 :2H 2 
 
 
 "O 1; H 
 
 
 ca — - 
 
 
 
 
 Eye 
 Mid 
 Fro I 
 
 
 O O rH 
 
 
 >— ' ,-1 
 
 •73 
 
 
 (D 
 
 U. 
 
 PQ 
 
 
 u 
 
 i 
 
 c3 
 
 CO 
 
 -*j 
 
 o 
 
 J-i 
 
 
 O 
 
 C3 - 
 
 i-H 
 
 ^ ■* 
 
 l«i=i 
 
 C >^ ^ 
 
 
 CO aj c 
 
 ^ 
 
 O COO' 
 
 C3 
 
 ;-( 
 
 • • . 
 
 c3 
 
 o CO b^ CO 
 
 -t-3 
 
 
 ;h 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 «»?-( 
 
 
 r<^ 
 
 trj 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 o ■ 
 
 tdO 
 
 pq 
 
 QJ 
 
 bD ^ 
 
 (XJ 
 
 
 
 > «5 . 
 
 
 
 
 13 o '> Sh 
 
 
 
 
 
 o - o "^ 
 
 
 ^ c r; m 
 
 f age 9,3, 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 93 
 
 Five balls, according to their size, are fired from mortars of cor- 
 responding calibres. With a charge of one-twentij-fftli of its weight 
 the ball is thrown from six hundred to seven hundred yards. 
 
 TO PREPARE AMMUNITION. 
 
 70. If the ammunition, for mortars is to be prepared and issued 
 by the artillery, two men, numbered 5 and 6, are added to each 
 detachment for that purpose. Their duties at the magazine are 
 similar to those prescribed in No. 5G. 
 
 Should wooden fuses he usedj in addition to the implements there- 
 in mentioned, n. fuze-saw will be required for reducing the fuzes to 
 the proper lengths. The shell being first charged, tlie fuze, cut at 
 the right length, is then driven. 
 
 The paper fuze is marked with the number of seconds which it 
 burns per inch. It may be cut with a knife to any desired length. 
 
 » 
 
 TIME OP FLIGHT, 
 
 71. The time of flight for siege mortars, at an elevation of 46°, 
 with ordinary charges, is nearly equal to the square root of the range 
 in feet divided by four. 
 
 The experimental length of the fuze may be given according to 
 this rule. 
 
 TO ASCERTAIN THE DISTANCE BY THE REPORT OF FIRE-ARMS. 
 
 72. Multiply the number of seconds which elapse between seeing 
 the flash and hearing the report by 1,100; the product will be 
 nearly the distance in feet. 
 
 RAPIDITY OP FIRING. 
 
 73. Siege mortars can be fired conveniently at the rate of twelve 
 rounds an hour continuously ; but they may in case of need, be fired 
 with greater rapidity. 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 
 Service of an S-incJi Siege Mortar. 
 
 Three men are necessary : Qne gunner and two other Cannoneers' 
 
 74. The mortar is upon its platform. 
 
94 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 The implements, eti., omitting two handspikes, and adding one 
 grummet-wad, are the same as prescribed for the 10-inch siege mor- 
 tar in No. 57. -They are arranged as prescribed in that number. 
 The wad is in the basket. 
 
 75. The instruction for this piece is the same as that prescribed in 
 Lesson III, with the following modifications : 
 
 At the command Take Implements, No. 1 performs the duties 
 enjoined on- No. 3, and No. 2 those of No. 4, each in addition to his 
 own. No. 2 assists No. 1 to put on the sleeves^ and places the wad 
 on the platform in front of the transom. 
 
 76. At the command In Battery, No. 1 embars under the right 
 front manceuvrins; bolts. No. 2 embars under the left rear ma- 
 nceuvring bolts. 
 
 77. At the command Load, No. 1, having wiped out the mortar, 
 places the wiper upon the stake; pricks; and, if necessary, sweeps 
 the platform. 
 
 No. 2, laying down his handspike, goes for a cartridge and shell ; 
 carries the shell in the r^ght arm; passes between the gunner and 
 the muzzle, and places it on the wad; gives to the gunner the cart- 
 ridge, and if firing with paper fuzes, a fuze; and takes the wiper 
 from the stake. 
 
 The gunner, on returning the scraper to the basket, takes the 
 shell-hooks and lays them on the ground between himself and the 
 muzzle. Having, carefully poured in the powd'er, he returns the 
 cartridge-bag to No. 2, and distributes the powder evenly over the 
 bottom of the chamber; puts the fuze in the fuze-plug; inserts the 
 hooks in the ears of the shell; raises it about a foot from the ground 
 and holds it, while No. 2 wipes it; and then places it in the bore. 
 
 No. 2 replaces the wiper upon the stake; lays the 'slack of the 
 pointing-cord over the left manoeuvring bolts; and resumes his post. 
 
 78. At the command Point, Nos. 1 an'd 2 embar under either of 
 the front or rear notches, as required. At the signal from the gun- 
 ner, No. 1 prepares to fire the piece, as prescribed for No. 3, in 
 No. 64. ' 
 
 transportation. 
 
 79. One mortar wagon will carry three 8-inch siege mortars, with 
 their beds; to transport which requires eight horses and four drivers. 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 95 
 
 CHARGES^ ETC. 
 
 80. 
 
 Greatest charge of powder, - - - - 2 lbs. 
 
 Ordinary service charge, - - - - - 1 lb. 12 oz. 
 
 Charge of the shell filled with powder, - - - 2 lbs. 9 oz. 
 
 Bursting charge of the shell, - . • . - 1 lb. 
 
 Charge to blow out the fuze, - - - - 4 oz. 
 
 Range, charge 2 lbs., time of flight 20^^ - - 1,837 yards. 
 
 Range, charge 1^ lb., time of flight 14^'', - - 943 yards. 
 
 Proof range of powder, . . - . . 300 yards. 
 
 Weight of shell, - - - - - - 45 lbs. 
 
 LESSON V. 
 
 . Service of a Goeliom Mortar. 
 
 Tltree men are necessary: one gunner and two other cannoneers. 
 
 81. The mortar is upon its platform. 
 
 The intplements, etc., and their arrangement, are the same as 
 prescribed for the 8-inch siege mortar in No. 74. A 24-pdr. shell 
 is used. 
 
 82. The instruction for this piece is the same as that prescribed 
 in Lesson IV. 
 
 To prepare its ammunition, and to transport it by hand with ease, 
 two additional men are required. The gunner carries the basket 
 and implements. 
 
 83. It is. fired cither from behind intrenchments, like other mor- 
 tars, or it may accompany troops in effecting lodgments in towns and 
 fortified places. 
 
 84. As the shell is without ears, it should be strapped with tin, 
 having loops attached, through which a cord is passed for the pur- 
 pose of lowering it into the bore. The chamber being cylindrical, 
 a sponge is used, which is handled by No. 1. 
 
 CHARGES, ETC. . 
 
 85. 
 
 Greatest charge of powder, - - - - - 8 oz. 
 
 Charge of t^c shell filled with powder, - - -IB). 
 
 Bursting charge of the shell, - . 8 oz. 
 
96 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 Charge to blow out the fuze, - - - - - 2 oz. 
 
 Range, charge 8 oz, -..-.. 1,200 yards] 
 
 Range, charge G oz., ..-.-- 900 " 
 
 Range, charge 4 oz., - - - - - - 430 " 
 
 Proof range of powder, ..... 300 « 
 
 Weight of shell, - - - - - - 17 B5s. 
 
 LESSON VI. 
 
 Service of a 10-inch Sea-coast Mortar. 
 
 Five men are necessary : one gunner and four other cannoneers. 
 
 86. The mortar is upon its platform. 
 
 The implements, etc., with the addition of one sponge, are the 
 same as prescribed for the 10-inch siege mortar in No. 57. They 
 are arranged as prescribed in that number, except that the sponge 
 is placed upon props one yard behind No. 1, the sponge-head turned 
 towards the epaulnient. • 
 
 87. The instruction for this piece is the same as that prescribed 
 in Lesson III, -with the following modifications : 
 
 No. 1, after wiping the bore, sponges out the chamber; for this 
 purpose mounting upon the right cheek and bolster. 
 
 To scrape the bore, and to put in the cartridge and shell, the 
 gunner mounts upon a block in front of the muzzle. 
 
 The cartridge — its bag being of bombazine or flannel — is put 
 directly into the chamber by the gunner, and rammed by No. 1. 
 
 To lift the shell into the muzzle, Nos. 2 and 3 mount the cheeks, 
 and are assisted respectively by the gunner and No. 1. 
 
 In giving the elevation, Nos. 1 and 2 are assisted by Nos. 3 
 and 4. 
 
 Before priming, No. 3 pricks a second time. 
 
 CHARGES, ETC. 
 
 88. 
 
 Greatest charge of powder, - - - - - 10 lbs. 
 
 Charge of shell filled with *po-w-der. - . - 
 
 Bursting charge of the shell, - - - - 
 
 Charge to blow out the fuze, - - - - 
 
 Range, charge 10 lbs., time of flight SB^-', 
 
 Proof range of powder, 
 
 Weight of shell, ..... 
 
 
 
 
 (( 
 
 
 o 
 
 (( 
 
 
 5r 
 
 oz. 
 
 4 
 
 * 
 
 ,250 
 300 
 
 yo 
 
 yards 
 lbs. 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 97 
 
 LESSON VII. 
 Service of a l^-mch Sea-coast Mortar, 
 
 Five men are necessary : one gunner and four other cannoneers. 
 
 89. The mortar is upon its platform. 
 
 The implements, etc., and their arrangement, are the same as pre- 
 scribed for the 10-inch sea-coast mortar in No. 86. 
 
 90. The instruction for this piece differs in no respect from that 
 prescribed in Lesson VI. 
 
 CHARGES, ETO. 
 
 91. 
 
 Greatest charge of })o\V(ler, - - - - - 20 lbs, 
 
 Charire of the shell tilled with powder, » - - 11 •' 
 
 Bnvsting charge of the shell, - - - - - 6 '- 
 
 Charge to blow out tlie fuze, - - - - - 6 oz. 
 
 Range, charge 'JO il5s., time of flight (about) 40'^ - - 4,325 yards. 
 
 Proof range of powder, ..... 3Q0 <' 
 
 . Weight of shell. - - - - - - 200 BSs. 
 
 LESSON VIII. 
 
 • Service of a Stone Mortar. 
 
 Five men are necessary: one gunner and four other cannoneers. 
 
 92. The mortar is upon its platform. 
 
 The implements, etc., and their arrangement, are the same as 
 prescribed for the 10-inch sea-coast mortar in No. 86. 
 
 93. 'j'he instruction for tliis piece differs in no respect from that 
 prescribed in Lesson \1. 
 
 A wooden bottom is placed over the mouth of the chamber to re- 
 ceive the basket which contains the charge of stones. 
 
 CHARGES, ETC. 
 
 94. With a charge of a pound and a half of powder, and one 
 hundred and twenty pounds of stones, at an elevation of 60°, the 
 stems are thrown from one hundred and fifty to two hundred and 
 fifty yards. 
 
98 
 
 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 With fifteen G-pdr. shells, fuze fifteen seconds, charge of powder 
 one pound, elevation 33^, the shell may be thrown from fifty to one 
 hundred and fifty yards. 
 
 95. As the shells are liable to burst on leaving the bore, the 
 piece is fired by a slow match applied to a train of quick match, 
 giving the men time to place themselves under cover. 
 
 LESSON IX. 
 
 Service of a Gun mounted on a Barhctte Carriarje. 
 
 Ixcmark. — The instruction for a barbette gnn, although in many respects 
 ]"»iec)sely the same as that for a siege gun, is given in full, Ixtiuup the 
 iege gun is seldom found in the fbrts on the stja -board. 
 
 Five men are necessary : one gunner and four other cannoneers. 
 
 96. The piece is in battery. 
 
 The implements, etc., are arranged as follows: 
 
 r Two on each side of the carriage leaning 
 J against the parapet, in line with the can- 
 (_ n oncers. 
 One yard behind the cannoneers of the right, 
 the sponge uppermost, the sponge and ram- 
 mer-heads turned from the parapet, inclined 
 slightly from the piece, and suppqf ted upon 
 a prop; or; when this cannot be done conve- 
 niently, placed against the wall, the sponge 
 and rammer-heads nearest the piece, 
 f Against the parapet, outside of the pile of 
 I balls. 
 
 f Containing friction tubes, and the lanyard, 
 ■' wound in St. Andrew's cross upon its han- 
 ' die. Suspended from the knob of the cas- 
 cable. 
 Containing the gunner's level, breech sight, 
 finger-stall, priming-wire, gimlet, vent- 
 punch, chalk-line, and chalk. Suspended 
 (^ from the knob of .the cascable. 
 One on each side of the piece, at the foot of 
 the parapet, inside the handspikes. 
 
 Handspikes, 
 
 Sponge Rammer, \ 
 
 Pass-box, 
 
 Tube-pouch, 
 
 Gunner's-poucii, 
 
 I 
 
 Chocks, . 
 Yent-coveu 
 
 Covering the vent, 
 
I 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 p 
 o 
 
 n- 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 p 
 
 &3 
 
 Page 98. 
 
\ 
 
MANUAL ¥0n HEAVY ARTILLERY. 99 
 
 ToMPioN, ... In the muzzle. 
 
 -p f Leaning against tlie parapet, outside of the 
 
 ' ( pile or balls. 
 
 T, f Containing; cartridoes, at the safest and most 
 
 BUDGE-BARREL, < • <. 1 '' • P ^.^ 
 
 ' I convenient place in rear ot the piece. 
 
 When several guns are served together, there will be only one 
 gunner's level and two vent-punches to each battery, not exceeding 
 six pieces. To the same battery there will be one worm, one ladlej 
 and one wrencJi. 
 
 The balls are regularly piled on the banquette, on the left of 
 th.e piece. 
 
 The wads are placed between the parapet and the balls, partly 
 resting on them. 
 
 97. The cannoneers having been marched to their posts, the in- 
 structor explains to them the names and uses of the implements, 
 and the nomenclatures of the gun, its carriage and the battery. 
 
 98. To cause the implements to be distributed, the instructor 
 commands: 
 
 Take Implements. 
 
 The gunner mounts upon the tongue; takes off the vent-cover, 
 handing it to No. 2 to place against the parapet, outside of the 
 pass-box; gives the tube-pouch to No. 3; equips himself with his 
 own ])Ouch and the finger-stall, wearing the latter on the second 
 finger of the left hand; levels the piece by the elevating screw; ap- 
 plies his level to ascertain the line of metal, which, with the 'assis- 
 tance of No. 2, he marks with the chalk-line; and resumes his post. 
 
 No. 3 equips himself with the tube-pouch. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2, after passing handspikes to Nos. 3 and 4, take each 
 one for himself 
 
 99. The handspike is held in both hands; the hand nearest to 
 the parapet grasping it near the small end and at the height of 
 the shoulder, back of the hand down, elbow t(mching the body ; the 
 other hand back up, the arm extended naturally ; the butt of the 
 handspike upon the ground on the side farthest from the para- 
 pet, and six inches in advance of the alignment. 
 
 100. When the cannoneer lays down his handspike, he places it 
 directly before him, about six inches in advance of and parallel to 
 the alignment, the small end towards the parapet; and whenever 
 he thus lays it down for the performance of any particular duty. 
 
J-00 MA^'UAL FOR HEAVT ARTILLERY. 
 
 he will resume it on returning to his post after the completion 
 of that duty. 
 
 101. The instructor causes the service of the piece to be executed 
 by the following commands : 
 
 1. FrOxM Battery. 
 
 The gunner moves two paces to his right. 
 
 Nos. 1. '2, 3, and 4, facing from the parapet, embar, near the 
 tire ; Nos. 1 and 2 first facing the chocks on the rails in front of 
 the rollers through the front spokes of the wheels, over the front 
 manoeuviing bolts; and Nos. 3 and -1 through the rear spokes, under 
 the rear manoeuvring bolts. 
 
 Sho^ild there be no rear manoeuvring bolts, Nos 3 and 4 emba^ 
 under the braces, near the manoeuvring staples. 
 
 All being ready, the gunner gives the command Heave, which 
 will be repeated as often as may be necessary. As soon as the face 
 of the piece is about one yard from the parapet, he commands 
 Halt. All unbiir^ and resume their posts. Nos. 1 and 2 chock 
 the rollers. 
 
 2. Load hy Detail — Load. 
 
 102. Nos, 1, 2, 3 and 4 lay down their handspikes. 
 
 No. 2 takes out the tompion, and places it near the vent-cover. 
 
 No. 1 faces once and a half to his left; steps over the sponge and 
 rammer; faces the piece; takes the sponge with both hnnds, the 
 tacks»down, the right hand three feet from the sponge-head, the 
 left hand eighteen inches nearer to it; returns to the piece, placing 
 the left foot on the rail of the chassis in line with the face of the 
 piece, the right in the most convenient position; and rests the end 
 of the sponge in the muzzle, the staff in the prolongation of the 
 bore, supported by the right hand, the right arm extended, the 
 left hand flat against the side of the thigh. 
 
 Remark. — In order that Nos. 1 and 2 may loail with faciUty withom 
 standitifi on the chassis, a banquette should be placed between tlie head 
 of the chassis and the wall, or a >platfbrni attached to the head of the 
 
 chassis. 
 
 No. 2 .stejjs upon the rail on his side, and occupies a position on 
 the left of the piece corresponding to that of No. 1 on its right. He 
 seizes the staff with the left hand, back down, near to and outside of 
 the hand of No. 1 . 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 101 
 
 No. 3, as soon as the sponge is inserted in the bore, steps over 
 the rammer, and seizes the staff with both hands, as prescribed for the 
 spon«2;e; returns to his post; and stands ready to exchange with 
 No. i. 
 
 No. 4 takes the pass-box and goes to the rear for a cartridge; re- 
 turns with it, and places liiniself, fiicing the piece, about eighteen 
 inches to the rear and right of No. 2. 
 
 Tlie gunner mounts upon the tongue of the chassis, placing tht left 
 foot about six inches from the rear transom of the gun carriage, and 
 breaks well to the rear with the right fuot, the toe to the right; 
 closes the vent with the second finger of the left hand, bending 
 well forward to cover himself by the breech ; and turns the elevat- 
 ing screw with the right hand, so as to adjust the piece convenient- 
 ly for loading. 
 
 10 i. In the mean time Nos. 1 and 2 insert the sponge by the fol- 
 lowing motions : 
 
 First motion. — They insert the sponge as far as the hand of No. 
 1, bodies ereot, shoulders square. 
 
 Secojid motion. — They slide the hands along the staff, and seize it 
 at arm's length. . 
 
 Third motion. — They force the sponge down as prescribed in the 
 first motion. 
 
 Fourth motion. — They repeat the second motion. 
 
 Fifth motion. — They push the sponge to the bottom of the bore. 
 No. 1. replaces the It't hand on thestafl', hack up, six inches ntarer 
 to the muzzle than the right. No. :i places the right, hand, back 
 up, between the hands of No. 1. 
 
 If in executing those motions, or the corresponding ones with the 
 rammer, it be found that the sponge or rammer is at home at the 
 third or fourth motion, then what is prescribed for the fifth motion 
 will be perlbrmed at the third or fourth. The knee on the side to- 
 wards which the body is to be inclined is always bent, the other 
 straightened; and the weight of the body added, as much as possi- 
 ble, to the effort exerted by the arms. 
 
 o. Sponge. 
 
 104. Nos, 1 and 2, pressing the sponge firmly against the bottom 
 of the bore, turn it three times from right to left, and three times 
 from left to right; replace the hands on the thighs; and withdraw 
 the sponge by motions contrary to those prescribed for inserting it. 
 
102 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 Remark. — To handle the sponge wlien it is new and fits tight, it maybe- 
 come necessary fur Nos. 1 and 2 to use both hands. In this case it will be 
 inserted and witlidrawrj by short and quick motions. 
 
 iNo. 2 quits the staff, and turning towards No. 4, receives from 
 liim the cartridge, which he takes in both hands, back down, and 
 introduces into the bore bottom foremost, seams to the sides ; he then 
 grasps the rammer in the v/ay prescribed for the sponge. 
 
 No. 1, rising upon the right leg and turning towards his left, 
 passes the sponge above the rammer with the left hand to No. 3, 
 and receiving the rammer with the right, presei^s it "Xx^ prescribed 
 for the sponge, except that he rests the rammer-head against the 
 right side of the face of the piece. 
 
 No. 3, as soon as the sponge is withdrawn, passing the rammer 
 under the sponge with the right hand, receives the sponge from 
 Zn^o. 1 with the left, replaces it upon the prop, and resumes his post. 
 
 No. 4, settinij down the pass-box, takes out the cartridge and 
 it^sents it in both hands to No. 2, the choke to the front; returns 
 t;ie pass-box to its place , and picks up a ball, and afterwards a wad, 
 should one be required. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2 force down the cartridge by tlje motions prescribed 
 for forcing down the sponge. 
 
 4. Ram. 
 
 105. Nos. 1 and 2, drawing the rammer out to the full extent of 
 their arms, ram with a single stroke. No. 2 quits the staff, and 
 turning towards No. 4, receives from him the ball and wad, while 
 No. 1 throws out the rammer, and holds the head against the right 
 side of the face of the piece. No. 2, receiving successively the 
 ball and wad, introduces them into the bore, the ball first, and 
 seizes the staff' with the left hand. No. 4 then resumes his post. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2 force down the ball and wad together by the same 
 motions, and ram in the same manner as prescribed for the car- 
 tridge. No. 2 quits the rammer j sweeps, if necessary, the platform 
 on his own side; passes the broom to No. 1 ; and resumeg his post. 
 No. 1 throws out the rammer, and places it upon the pro]3 below the 
 sponge; finishes the sweeping; and resumes his post. 
 
 The gunner pricks, leaving the priming-wire in the vent, and, if 
 firing beyond point-blank range, adjusts the breech-sight to the dis- 
 tance. 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY AUTILLERY. 103 
 
 5. In Battery. 
 
 « 
 
 106. Nos. 1 and 2 uncliock the rollers, and with Nos. 3 and 4, 
 all facing towards the parapet, enibar ; Nos. 1 and 2 through the 
 front spokes of the wheels, near the tire, under the manoeuvring 
 bolts ; and Nos. 8 and 4 under the braces, near the manoeuvring 
 staples. 
 
 All being ready, the gunner commands Heave, and the piece is 
 run into battery ; the gunner following up the movement. As soon 
 as the rollers touch the hurters, he commands Halt. All unbar, 
 and Nos. 1, 2, o, and 4 resume their posts. 
 
 0. Point. 
 
 107. No. 3 lays down his handspike, passes the hook of the lan- 
 yard through the eye of a tube from front to rear, and holds the 
 liandle of the lanyard with the right hand, the hook between the 
 thumb and forefinger. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 4 go to the traverse wheels, and, facing towards the 
 parapet, embar under the fork-bolts or under the wheels. No. 1, 
 in passing from and to his post, moves on the outside of No. 3. 
 
 The gunner withdraws the priming-wire, and, aided by Nos. 1 and 4, 
 p;ives the direction ; causing the trail to be moved by ^commanding 
 Left, or Right, tapping at the same time on the right side of the 
 breech for No. 1 to move the chassis to the left, or on the left side tor 
 No. 4 to move it to the right. 
 
 He then places the centre point of the breech-sight accurately 
 upon the chalk mark on the base-ring, and by the elevating screw 
 gives the proper elevation, rectifying the direction, if necessary. 
 
 The moment the piece is correctly pointed, he rises on the left 
 leg, and gives the word Ready, making a signal with both hands, at 
 which Nos. 1 and 4 unbar, and resume their posts ; takes the breech- 
 sight with the left hand, and receiving the tube from No. 3, inserts 
 it in the vent; dismounts from the tongue; and goes to the wind- 
 ward to observe the effect of the shot. 
 
 No. 3 drops the handle, allowing the lanyard to uncoil as he 
 steps back to his post, holding it slightly stretched with the right 
 hand, the cord passing between the fingers, back of the hand up; 
 and breaks to the rear a full pace with the left foot, the left hand 
 against the thigh. 
 
 At the word I^eady, Nos. 1 and 2 take the chocks, and breaking 
 
104 MANUAL lOK HEAVY AKTILLEKY. 
 
 oflFwith the feet fiirthest from tlie parapet, stand ready to chock 
 the rollers. 
 
 108. In directing the piece to be fired, the instructor will designate 
 it by its number, as, for example : 
 
 7. Nnmher one — FlRE. 
 
 No. 3 gives a smart pull upon the lanyard. 
 
 Immediately after the discharge of the piece, Nos. 1 and 2 chock 
 the rollers, and resume the erect position. No. 3 resumes the erect 
 po.sition, and rewinds the lanyard in St. Andrew's cross upon its 
 handle, returning it if dry to the tube-pouch. The gunner, having 
 observed the effect of the shot, returns to his post. 
 
 109. Whenever the piece is to be fired by a lock, jjort-firej or slow- 
 match, it will be done by No. 3, as prescribed for No. 4, in the in- 
 struction for field artillery. 
 
 110. To continue the exercise, the instructor resumes the series of 
 commands, beginning with From Battery. 
 
 TO CHANGE POSTS. 
 
 111. To change posts the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Change Posts. 2. March. 3. Call Off. 
 
 At the first command, the cannoneers lay down their handspikes; 
 place their equipments on the parts of the carriage nearest to them; 
 and face to their left. 
 
 At the second command, they step off, each advancing one post; 
 No. 2 taking that of No. 1. Nos. 2 and 3 pass to the rear of the 
 chassis; No. 2 on the outside of all the cannoneers. On arriving at 
 their posts, they face to the piece, and equip themselves. 
 
 At the third command, they call off, according to the posts they 
 are to occupy. 
 
 TO LOAD FOR ACTION. 
 
 112. The cannoneers having been sufiiciently instructed in the 
 details of the movements, the instructor commands : 
 
 Load for action — Load. 
 
 The piece is run from battery, loaded, run into battery, pointed, 
 and prepared for firing, by the following commands from the gunner : 
 From Battery — Load — In Battery — Point — Ready. 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. .105 
 
 At the command or signal from the instructor to commence firing, 
 the gunner gives the command Fire, and continues the action until 
 the instructor directs the firing to cease. 
 
 TO CEASE FIRING. 
 
 113. To cause the firing to cease, the instructor commands: 
 
 Cease Firing. 
 
 Whether the cannoneers are loading hy detail or for action, the 
 piece is sponged out, and all resume their posts. If the cartridge 
 has been inserted, the loading will be completed, unless the instruc- 
 tor should otherwise direct. 
 
 TO SECURE PIECE, AND REPLACE IMPLEMENTS. 
 
 114. To discontinue the exercise, the instructor having ordered the 
 firing to cease, and caused the piece to be run into battery, gives 
 the following commands : 
 
 1. Secure Piece. 
 
 No. 2 returns the tompion to the muzzle, the gunner puts on the 
 vent-cover, which he receives from No. 2, and depresses the piece. 
 
 2. Replace Implements. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2 replace the handspikes against the parapet, Nos. 
 3 and 4 passing theirs to them for that purpose. The gunner hangs 
 the pouches upon the knob of the cascable. 
 
 TO LEAVE THE BATTERY. 
 
 115. The instructor forms the detachment in rear of the piece; 
 and marches it from the battery as prescribed in No. 12. 
 
 TO SERVE THE PIECE WITH REDUCED NUMBERS. 
 
 Executed as in No. 34. 
 
 CHARGES, ETC. 
 
 Wads. • 
 
 Rapid ill/ of Jirinrj. 
 Penetration of shot. 
 Sec Nos. 37, o9, and 40. 
 
106 
 
 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 LESSON XII. 
 
 Service of a Gun mounted on a Casemate Carriage. 
 
 Five men are necessary; one gunner and four other cannoneers. 
 
 120. The piece is in battery. 
 
 The implements, etc., are arranged as follows : , 
 
 r One on each side of the carriage, leaning 
 I against the wall, in line with the can- 
 (^ noneers. 
 
 J One on each side of the carriage, leaning 
 ( against the wall, behind Nos. 3 and l"''- 
 ( One on each side of the carriage, leaning 
 < against the wall, opposite to the end of the 
 (^ tongue. 
 
 ( Leaning against the wall, behind the gunner, 
 ) or laid down in the alignment on his right. 
 f About one yard behhid the connoneers of 
 j the right, the sponge uppermost, the sponge 
 \ and rammer-heads turned from the embra- 
 j sure, inclined slightly from the piece, and 
 (^ supported upon a proper block. 
 
 Behind No. 4. 
 f Containing friction tubes, and the lanyard, 
 J wound in St. Andrew's cross upon its 
 1 handle. Suspended from the knob of the 
 1^ cascable. 
 Containing the gunner's level, breech-sight, 
 finger-stall, priming-wire, gimlet, vent- 
 punch, and chalk-line, and chalk. Sus- 
 pended from the knob of the cascable. 
 One on each side of the carriage, on the 
 front transom of the chassis, handles out- 
 wards. 
 Coverinoj the vent. 
 In the muzzle. 
 
 Truck-hand- 
 spikes, . . 
 
 Elevating-hand- 
 spikes, . . . 
 
 Traversing- 
 handspikes, . 
 
 Roller-hand- 
 spike, . . . 
 
 Sponge-rammer, 
 
 Pass-bo: 
 
 Tube-pouch, 
 
 Gunners'-pouch, 
 
 Chocks, . 
 Vent-cover, 
 
 TOxMPION, 
 
 ■^^' These are manmuvring handspikes With two pieces in one case- 
 mate, or where tlje pieces are not separated by piers, they may be placed 
 against the nearest wall, or hiid down in the most convenient position. 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 107 
 
 -^ ( Lcanino: a<2rainst the scarp-wall, on the left of 
 
 Broom, • • • | the piece. 
 
 ( Containing cartridges, at the safest and 
 BuDGE-BARREL, -! most convenient place in rear of the 
 (^ piece. 
 
 When several guns are served together, there will be only one 
 gunner's level and two vent-punches to each battery, not ex- 
 ceeding six pieces. To the same battery there will be one icorm, 
 one ladle, and one lorench. 
 
 The balls are regularly ^iled against the wall, behind No. 2. 
 
 The wads arc placed between "the wall and the balls, partly rest- 
 ing on them. 
 
 "121. The cannoneers having been marched to their posts, the in- 
 structor explains to them the names and uses of the implements, 
 and the nomenclatures of the gun, its carriage, and the bat- 
 tery. 
 
 122. To cause the implements to be distributed, the instructor 
 commands : 
 
 Take Implements. 
 
 The gunner mounts upon the tongue; takes off the vent-cover, 
 handing it to No. 2 to place against the scarp ; gives the tube- 
 pouch to No. 3 ; and equips himself with his own pouch and finger- 
 stall, wearing the latter on the second finger of the left hand. With 
 the assistance of No. 3 he levels the piece, and applies his level to 
 ascertain the line of metal, which, with the assistance of No. 2, he 
 marks with the chalk line. (If the gun has permanent sights, 
 this is only necessary for instruction, or for verifying the sight.) 
 He then takes the roller-handspike, and resumes his post. This 
 handspike is held vertically with the right hand, the lower end 
 upon the ground in line with the toes, the arms extended naturally. 
 
 No. 3 equips himself with the tube-pouch. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2 take the truck-handspikes with the hand farthest 
 from the wall, and carry them to that side, holding them vertically, 
 the lower end upon the ground in line with the toes, the arms ex- 
 tended naturally. 
 
 12:-{. The instructor causes the service of the piece to be exe- 
 cuted by the following commands : 
 
 1. From Battery. 
 The gunner cmbars in the left mortise of the roller. 
 
108 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2, facing from the scarp wall, embar in the most con- 
 venient front mortises of the truck-wheels, the hand farthest from 
 the carriage at the top of the handspike, the other hand eight 
 inches lower. 
 
 Nos. 3 and 4 go to the assistance of Nos. 1 and 2, and, facing to- 
 wards them, seize the handspikes with both hands between those of 
 Nos. 1 and 2. 
 
 Nos. 1, 2, 8, and 4 in applying themselves to the carriage either 
 to run it from or to battery, break to the rear with the foot nearest 
 to the carriage. . ' 
 
 All being ready, the gunner presses the roller under the rear 
 transom of the gun carriage, by bearing down upon his handspike, 
 and gives the command, Heave. 
 
 Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 act together, and bea;r upon the handspikes 
 until they are nearly down to the rails. The gunner then disen- 
 gages the roller from under the transom by raising his handspike, 
 and commands, Unbar. Nos. 1 and 2 let go the handspikes with 
 the hand nearest to the carriage, and chock the wheels. Nos. 3 and . 
 4 withdraw the handspikes and pass them to Nos. 1 and 2, who re- 
 insert them in the front mortises. 
 
 The gunner again bearing down upon his handspike, gives the 
 command. Heave, and so on, until the face of the piece is about 
 one yard from the wall, when, raising his handspike, he commands. 
 Halt, and shifts it into the. right mortise of the roller. Nos. 1 
 and 2 chock the wheels, and replace their handspikes against the 
 wall. All resume their posts. 
 
 2. Load hy detail — Load. 
 
 124. Executed as in Nos. 103 and 104, with the following modi- 
 fication: No. ^, facing towards the scarp, embars under the breech, 
 and maintains the piece in a convenient position for inserting the 
 sponge, until he receives a signal from the gunner to unbar. 
 
 3. Sponge. 
 
 125. Executed as in No. 104. 
 
 .^ 4. Ram. 
 
 126. Executed as in No. 105. 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 109 
 
 5. In Battery. 
 
 127. Nos. 1 and 2 unchock the wheels, and, facing from the 
 scarp wall apply their hands to the front of the cheeks. 
 
 Nos. 3 and 4, facing towards the scarp wall, lay hold of the han- 
 dles. 
 
 The gunner bears down carefully upon the roller-handspike, and 
 the piece is run into battery. As soon as the wheels touch the 
 hurters, he commands, Halt. Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 resume their 
 posts. 
 
 6. Point. 
 
 128. Nos. 1 and 4 take the traversing handspikes, and, facing 
 towards the scarp wall, embar under the ends of the rear transom 
 of the chassis. No. 1, in passing to and from his post, moves on 
 the outside of No. 3. 
 
 When the elevation is given by the quoin, No. 2 takes an eleva- 
 ting handspike and embars upon the left check under the rein- 
 force. 
 
 The gunner withdraws the priming-wire, and, aided by Nos. 1 
 and 4, gives the direction, as in No. 107. 
 
 Ho then applies the breech sight, if necessary, and points the 
 piece ; commanding Lower, or Raise, tapping at the same time 
 on the upper side of the knob of the cascable with the left hand, 
 and drawing out the quoin with the right, in order to elevate, or 
 tapping upwards on the lower side and shoving in the quoin, in or- 
 der to depress the piece. 
 
 The moment the piece is correctly pointed, he rises on the left 
 leg and gives the word. Ready, making a signal with both hands, 
 at which Nos. 1, 2, and 4 unbar, replace their handspikes, and re- 
 sume their posts; takes the breech-sight with the lelt hand, the 
 rollei -handspike with the right, and disposes himself to observe the 
 effect of the shot. 
 
 If the elevation is given by a screw, No. 3 turns its handle by 
 direction of the gunner. 
 
 No. 3, having pas^d the hook of the lanyard through the eye of 
 a tube from front to rear, inserts it in the] vent, and stretches the 
 lanyard as in No. 107. 
 
 At the word, Ready, Nos. 1 and 2 take the chocks, and breaking 
 off with the feet farthest from the wall, stand ready to chock the 
 wheels. 
 
110 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 7. Numher one (or the like) — FiRE. 
 
 129. Executed as in No. 108. 
 
 What is prescribed in No. 109 will apply to this piece. 
 
 130. To continue the exercise, the instructor resumes the series 
 of commands, beginning with From Battery : 
 
 To change posts. 
 To load for action. 
 To cease firing. 
 
 To secure piece, and replace implements. 
 Executed as in Nos. 111^ 112, 113, and 115. 
 
 TO LEAVE THE BATTERY. 
 
 131. The instructor forms the detachment in rear of the piece, 
 and marches it from the battery as prescribed in No. 12. 
 
 132. Remark — The service of a gun mounted on a casemate 
 carriage of the old pattern, (which is without the eccentric roller,) 
 will require the following mod'fication : The roller-handspike is dis- 
 pensed with, and the gunner, at the command. From Battery, 
 moves two paces to the right. 
 
 to serve the piece with reduced numbers. 
 Executed as in No, 34. 
 
 CHARGES, etc. 
 
 133. The ordinary service charge of powder for heavy guns is 
 one-fourth the weight of the shot. For firing double shot it is one- ' 
 sixth that weight. 
 
 Range of a 42-pdr., at an elevation of i° 30'', cliarge 
 
 lOJBs., - - - - • - 
 
 Range of a 42-pdr., at an elevation of 5°, charge 
 
 lO^llJs., ..-.-- 
 Range of a 32-pdr., at an elevation of 1° 30^, charge 
 
 8 lbs., - - ' - 
 
 Range of a 32-pdr., at an elevation of 5°, charge 8 lbs. 
 Proof range of powder, . . . - - 
 
 Greatest elevation the carriage admits, • . ? . 
 
 Greatest depression the carriage admits, 
 
 Wads. 
 
 Rapidity of firing. 
 Penetration of shot. 
 See Nos. 37, 39, and 40. 
 
 860 
 
 yards. 
 
 1,955 
 
 (( 
 
 800 
 
 << 
 
 1,922 
 
 (( 
 
 300 
 
 (( 
 
 8° 
 
 
 4° 
 
 
8-Inch Columbiad on a Casement Carriage. 
 
 Page 111. 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. Ill 
 
 LESSON XIII. 
 
 Service of an S-inch Columbiad mounted on a Casemate Carriage. 
 
 Five men are necessary : one gunner and four other cannoneers. 
 
 134. The piece is in battery. 
 
 The implements, ect., and their arrangement, are the same as pre- 
 scribed for the casemate gmi in No. 120, substituting haversack — 
 worn by No. 4 from the right shoulder to the left side— for pass- 
 box. ( 
 
 The shells are at the magazine, or other safe position, and are 
 brought, as required, to the place prescribed for the budge-barrel. 
 
 135. The instruction for this piece differs in no material respect 
 from that prescribed in Lesson XII. 
 
 It is loaded with shell, which is attached to a sabot. The shell is 
 brought up by No. 4 together with the cartridge, and is set home 
 in the same manner as the ball, except that it is not rammed. 
 
 ■CHARGES, ETC. 
 
 136. 
 
 - 
 
 10 lbs. 
 
 - 
 
 2 lbs. 9 oz, 
 
 - 
 
 1 lb. 
 
 - 
 
 4 oz. 
 
 }: 
 
 919 yards. 
 
 1,813 yards. 
 
 - 
 
 3U0 yards. 
 
 - 
 
 50 lbs. 
 
 Greatest charge of powder, ... 
 
 Charge of the shell filled with powder, 
 Bursting charge of the shell. 
 Charge to blow out the fuze, 
 
 Range at an angle of 1°, ch. 10 lbs. 1 Axis of the piece 16 ft. 
 Range at an angle of 5°, ch. 10 lbs. J above the water. 
 Proof range of powder, .... 
 
 Weight of shell, ..... 
 
 LESSON XIV. 
 
 Service of a li-pdr. Howitzer mounted on a Flank Casemate Car 
 
 riage. 
 
 Three men are necessary : one gunner and two other cannon- 
 
 eers. 
 
 137. The piece is in battery. 
 
112 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 The implements, etc., are arranged as follows : 
 
 ' ] No. 2. 
 
 Sponge & rammer, j ^^""'"S "S'^'"'' "/« '."'"'P 7^""' '^"'''"^ ^"^ 
 ' (^ 1, the rammer-head on the grouna. 
 
 Haversack, - - Suspended from the knob of the cascable. 
 
 f Containing the finger-stall, priming-wire, 
 
 m J friction tubes, and the lanyard, wound in 
 
 ^ " ~ I St. Andrew's cross upon its handle. Sus- 
 
 ( pended from the knob of the cascable. 
 Yent-cover, - - Covering the vent. 
 ,ToMPiON, ... In the muzzle. 
 Broom, - - - - On the left of the piece. 
 
 Bf Containing- cartridires, at the safest and 
 UDGE-BARREL, - < . ^ • * i'^ • r ^^ 
 
 ' ( n)ost convenient place in rear oi the piece. 
 
 The rounds of canister are arranged against the scarp wall, be- 
 hind No. 2. The shells, if used, are at the magazine, or other safe 
 position, and are brought, as required, to the place prescribed for the 
 budge- barrel. 
 
 138. .The cannoneers having been inarched to their posts, the in- 
 structor explains to them the names and uses of the implements, 
 and the nomenclatures of the howitzer, its carriage, and the battery. 
 
 139. To cause the implements to be distributed, the instructor 
 commands : 
 
 Take Implements. 
 
 The gunner takes the priming-wire and finger-stall, wearing the 
 latter on the second finger of the right hand ; gives the tube-pouch 
 to No. 1, and the havers-ick to No. 2 ; takes off the vent-cover and 
 places it against the scarp wall outside of the canisters ; seizes the 
 roller-handspike with the right hand, and resumes his post ; holding 
 the handspike vertically on the right side, its lower end in line with 
 the toes, the arm extended naturally. 
 
 No. 1 equips himself with the tube-pouch. 
 
 No. 2 equips himself with the haversack, which he wears from 
 the right shoulder to the left side. 
 
 140. The instructor causes the service of the piece to be execu- 
 ted by the following commands : 
 
 1. Fro^i Battery. 
 
 The gunner, embarring on the left mortise, presses the roller un- 
 der the rear transom, and seizes the left handle with the left hand. 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 113 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2 lay hold of the manoeuvring rings and handles. 
 
 All being ready, the gunner gives the command, Heave, and the 
 carriage is run to the rear until the face of the piece is about one 
 yard I'rom the wall, when, disengaging the roller, he commands, 
 PIalt. All resume their posts. 
 
 2. Load hy Deia'd — Load. 
 
 141. The gunner places himself at the breech; breaks the rear 
 with the right loot ; closes the vent with the second linger of the 
 right hand j and njanages the elevating screw with the left. 
 
 No. 1 seizing the sponge-staff at its middle, brings it across his 
 body ; plants the left foot opposite to the muzzle, close to the carriage, 
 and breaks off with the right foot; at the same time throwing the 
 sponge staff into the left hand, bagk down*, and extending both 
 hands towards the ends of the staff, so as to enter the rammer-head 
 into the embrasure and bring the sponge opposite to the muzzle. 
 He then inserts it, and presses it to the bottom of the chamber with 
 three motions. 
 
 No. 2 goes for a cartridge, and '/eturns to his post. If shells are 
 used^ he brings a shell at the same time. 
 
 3. Sponge. 
 
 142. No. 1, using both hands, sponges the chamber carefully ; 
 withdraws the sponge, pressing it against the bottom of the bore; 
 turns it over, stepping to his left lor this purpose, and rosts the 
 ranimcr-head against the right side of the face of the piece. 
 
 No. 2 introduces the cartridge, bottom foremost, seams downward. 
 No. 1 sets it home by three motions, with the right hand. 
 
 4. Ram. 
 
 143. No. 1, drawins: out the rammer to the full extent of his 
 arm, rams once, and throws out the rammer, holding it as before, 
 the rammer-head against the riaht side of the face of the piece. 
 
 No. 2 introduces the canister or shell home with care ; throws out 
 the rammer; replaces it ; and resumes his post. 
 
 The gunner, rising upon the left log, pricks, leaving the priming- 
 wire in the vent, and resumes his post. 
 
114 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLEKY, 
 
 5. In Battery. 
 
 144. All apply tlicmselves to tlic carriage, as prescribed in No. 
 140, and ease the j^iece into battery. As soon as it touches the 
 hurters, the gunner commands, Halt. All resume their posts. 
 
 G. l^OINT. 
 
 145. No. 1 makes read}^ a tube, as prescribed for No. 3, in No. 24. 
 No. 2 goes to the rear of the chassis, and, facing to the front, 
 
 applies himself to it by hand, in order to traverse it. 
 
 The gunner \Yithdraws the priming-wire, and, having pointed the 
 piece, gives the word, Eeady, making a signal with both hands, at 
 which No. 2 resumesiiis post; takes out the roller-handspike, and 
 resumes his post. 
 
 No. 1 steps to the vent and inserts the tube, holding the lanyard 
 slightly stretched with the right hand, the cord passing between the 
 fingers, back of the hand up, and breaks to his rear a full pace with 
 the left foot, the left hand against the thigh. 
 
 7. N'lmiher one (or the like) — Fire. 
 
 146. No. 1 fires as prescribed for No. 3, in No. 25. 
 
 What is prescribed in No. 26 will apply to this piece, substituting 
 No. 1 for No. 3. 
 
 147. To continue the exercise, the instructor resumes the series 
 of commands, beginning with From Battery. 
 
 To change 2>osts. 
 
 To load for action. 
 
 lo cease firing. 
 
 To secure piece) and replace implements. 
 
 To leave the hattery. 
 
 Executed as in Nos. Ill, 112, 113, 114, and 115. 
 
 CHARGES, ETC. 
 148. 
 
 Charge of powder, - - - - - 2 lbs. 
 
 Range at an angle of 0°, charge 2 lbs., shell, - - 295 yard.?. 
 
 Range at an angle of 1°, charge 2 lbs., shell, - - 516 yards* 
 
MANUAL FOB HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 115 
 
 Range at an angle of 5°, charge 2 lbs., shell, 
 
 Range at an angle of 2°, charge If lbs., spher.-capc, time 2''^, 
 
 Range at an angle of 5° 30'', charge 1| lbs., spherical-case, 
 
 time 4^^, . . . . . 
 
 Range at an angle of 3° 30^, charge 2 lbs., spherical-case, 
 
 time 3^^, . . . . . 
 
 Proof range of powder, - - . . 
 
 Weight of the 24-pdr. shell, .... 
 Weight of the round of canister, - - P 
 
 No. of bullets in a round of canister. 
 
 1,322 
 600 
 
 yards, 
 yards. 
 
 1,050 yardt 
 
 880 
 
 300 
 
 17 
 
 21 
 
 ■ 48 
 
 yards. 
 
 yards. 
 
 lbs. 
 
 lbs. 
 
 lbs. 
 
 LESSON XV. 
 
 Service of an Sinch Oolumhiad, mounted on a Columhiad 
 
 Carriage. 
 
 Five men are necessary: one gunner and four other cannoneers. 
 
 149. The piece. is in battery. 
 
 The implements^ etc., are arranged as follows: 
 
 r Two on each side of the carriage, laid on the 
 < rails, one in rear of each front truck-wheel, 
 (^ and one in rear of each redr truck-wheel. 
 ( One on each side of the carriage, laid on the 
 J ground in a line with th« cannoneers, op- 
 I posite to the traverse wheels, the small ends 
 (^ towards the parapet, 
 
 ( Laid across the ties at the junction of the 
 ( braces, handle to the left, 
 f One yard behind the cannoneers of the right, 
 I the sponge uppermost, the sponge and ram- 
 •l mer-heads turned from the parapet, in- 
 1 clined slightly from the piece, and sup- 
 l^ ported upon a prop. 
 
 Suspended from the knob of the cascable. 
 
 f Cgntaining friction tubes, and the lanyard, 
 
 J wound in St. Andrew's cross upon its han- 
 
 j die. Suspended from the knob of the 
 
 l^ cascable. 
 
 [ Containing the gunner's level, breech-sight, 
 
 GUNNER'S-POUCH, I ^^^f -^^'^IJ' priming-wire, gunner's gimlet, 
 ' I vent-punch, chalk-line, and chalk. Sus- 
 ( pendcd from the knob of the cascable. 
 
 Truck-hand- 
 spikes. 
 
 Manceuvring- 
 iiandspikes, 
 
 Elevating-bar, 
 
 Sponge-rammer, 
 
 Haversack, 
 Tube-pouch, 
 
116 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 Chocks . - . J ^"^ ^^^ ^^^^ ^^'^^ ^^ ^^^^ piece, laid on the 
 
 ' I front of the ruiis. 
 
 Vent-cover, - - Covering the vent. 
 ToMPiON, - - - In the muzzle. 
 Tg f Leaning against the parapet, to the left of the 
 
 ' 1 piece. 
 
 BuDGE-BARREL, - ! Containing Cartridges, at the safest and most 
 ( convenient place in rear or the piece. 
 When several columbiads are served together, there will be only 
 one gunner's level and two vent-punches to each battery, not ex- 
 ceeding six pieces. To the same battery there will be one worm 
 and one tci^cnch. 
 
 The shells are at the magazine, or other safe position, and are 
 brought, as required, to the phice prescribed for the budge-bairel. 
 
 150. The cannoneers having been marched to their posts, th:; in- 
 structor explains to them the names and uses of the implements, 
 and the nomenclatures of the columbiad, its carriage, and the battery. 
 
 151. To cause the implements to be distributed, the instructor 
 commands: 
 
 Take Implements. 
 
 The gunner s*"eps to the knob of the cascable ; takes off the vent- 
 cover, handing it to No. 2 to place against the parapet, in rear of his 
 post ; gives the tube-pouch to No. 8, and the haversack to No. 4 ; 
 equips himself with his own pouch and the finger-stall, wearing the 
 latter on the second finger of the left hand ; takes the elevating bar, 
 and stepping between the rails, levels the piece conveniently for 
 loading; applies his level to verify theiine of sight which is marked 
 on the piece, marking it, if necessary, with the chalk line, assisted 
 by No. 2; and resumes his post, holding the elevating-bar with the 
 right hand. 
 
 No. 3 equips himself with the tube-pouch. 
 
 No. 4 equips himself with the haversack, which he wears from 
 the right shoulder to the left side. 
 
 Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 'take the truck-handspikes with the hand fur- 
 thest from the parapet, and carry them to that side, holding them 
 vertically, the arm extended naturally. 
 
 152. The instructor causes the service of the piece to be executed 
 by the following commands : 
 
 1. From Battery. 
 
 The gunner moves two paces to the right of his post. 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 117 
 
 Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4, f\icing from the parapet, place the wrenches 
 on the ends of the axle-trees, the handspikes elevated about 30° to 
 the rear, and at the word Heave by the gunner, bear down and 
 throw the wheels into gear; Nos. 3 and 4 immediately after laying 
 their handspikes on the platform in front of their posts. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2, facing IVom the parapet, embar in the most conve- 
 nient front mortises of the truck-wheels, the hand furthest from the 
 carriage at the top of the handspike, the other hand eight inches 
 lower. 
 
 Nos. 3 and 4 go to the assistance of Nos. 1 and 2, and, facing to- 
 wards them, seize the handspikes with both hands between those of 
 Nos. 1 and 2. 
 
 Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4, in applying themselves to the carriage, to run 
 it fiom or to battery, break to the rear with the foot nearest to the 
 carriage. 
 
 All being ready, the gunner gives the command, Heave. 
 
 Nos. 1, 2, 3,. and 4 act togetiicr, and bear upon the handspikes 
 until they are nea^'ly down to the rails, when the gunner commands, 
 Unbar. Nos. 1 and 2 let go the handspikes witli the hand nearest 
 to the carriage, and chock the wheels. Nos. 3 and 4 withdraw the 
 hands] likes and pass them to No. 1 and 2, who re-insert them in the 
 IVont mortises. 
 
 Tiie gunner again gives the command, Heave, and so on, until 
 the face of the piece is about one yard from the parapet, when he 
 commands, Halt." Nos. 3 and 4 take their posts. Nos. 1 and 2 
 chock the wheels as before, unbar, and place the wrench of their 
 handspikes on the ends of tlie axle-tree of the front wheels. At the 
 comniand Out of Gkar by the gunner, they throw the wheels out 
 of licar; lay tl.eir handspikes on the rails between the wheels; and 
 take their posts. 
 
 2. Loail hy Detail — LoAD. 
 
 153. Executed as in Nos. 102 and 103. The gunner, if neces- 
 s:^ry, adjusts the piece conveniently for loading before closing the 
 vent. No. 4 brings up a shell, together with the cartridge. ^ 
 
 3. Sponge. 
 
 15 L Executed as in No. 104. 
 
118 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 4. Eam. 
 
 155. Executed as in No. 105, except that the shell is set care- 
 fully home without being rammed. 
 
 5. In Battery. 
 
 156. Nos. 1 and 2 unchock the wheels, and place the chocks on 
 the ties. 
 
 Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4, facing towards the parapet, apply the wrenches 
 of their handspikes to the ends of the axle-trees; Nos. 1 and 2 so as 
 to throw the front wheels into gear, and Nos. 3 and 4 so as to throw 
 the rear wheels out of gear. 
 
 The gunner commands, Heave, when the front wheels are thrown 
 into gear. 
 
 Should the carriage run too easily after it is in motion, the gun- 
 ner will command. Rear Wheels out of Gear, when the rear 
 wheels are thrown out of gear. Nos. 3 and 4 each take a chock 
 and hold it in front of the rear wheels, ready to apply it under them 
 if necessary. 
 
 When the head of the cheeks is about one foot from the end of 
 the rails, the gunner commands, Chock, when Nos. 3 and 4 chock 
 the rear wheels. The wheels are unchocked, and the piece is run 
 gently into battery, by Nos. 3 and 4 throwing the rear wheels alter- 
 nately out of and into gear. As soon as the head of the carriage 
 touches the hurters, the gunner commands, Out of Gear, when 
 the front wheels are thrown out of gear 3 also the rear wheels, should 
 they be in gear. Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 take their posts, and lay their 
 handspikes on the platform just in front of them. 
 
 * 6. Point. 
 
 157. No. 3 passes the hook of the lanyard through the eye of a 
 tube from front to rear; holds the handle of the lanyard with the 
 rigljt hand, the hook between the thumb and forefinger; and stands 
 ready to hand it to the gunner. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2, passing outside of the other cannoneers, move to 
 the rear of the chassis, and, each taking one of the manoeuvring 
 handspikes, embar with the levelled e,pd under the traverse wheels. 
 For traversing large angles, Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 apply themselves by 
 hand at the end of the chassis. 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 119 
 
 The gunner withdraws the priming-wire; inserts the pawl of the 
 elevating machine in the proper notch by means of the elevating 
 bar, and with the breech sight gives the required elevation ; No. 4 
 turning the handle of the screw according to his direction. 
 
 The moment the piece is correctly pointed, he rises on the left 
 leg, and gives the word Heady, making a signal with both hands, 
 at which Nos. 1 and 2 unbar, lay down the handspikes, and resume 
 their post ; receives the tube from No. 3, which he inserts in the 
 vent; dismounts from the chassis; and goes to the windward to ob- 
 serve the effect of the shot. 
 
 No. 3 stretches the lanyard as in No. 107. 
 
 7. Nmnher one (or the like) — FlRE. 
 
 , 158. Executed as in No. 108. 
 What is prescribed in No. 109 will apply to this piece. 
 
 159. Remark.— li' the piece is to be fired at high angles, it is 
 elevated in the following manner : 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2 — the former carrying his traversing handspike with 
 him — move to the mule ; place the handspike in the bore; pass the 
 bight of a truce-rope over it ; and bear down slightly on the hand- 
 spike to enable the gunner to frie the pawl from the notch. The 
 gunner draws the pawl back by its handle, and commands Ease 
 Away. Nos. 1 and 2, holding the ends of the rope, ease down the 
 breech steadily, until the gunner commands, Steady, when he 
 inserts the pawl in the proper notch. 
 
 160. To continue the exercise, the instructor resumes the series 
 of commands, beginning with From Battery : 
 
 To change 2)osfs. 
 
 To load for action. ^ 
 
 To cease jiring. 
 
 To secure piece, and replace implements. 
 
 To leave the battery. * 
 
 Executed as in Nos. Ill, 112, 113, 114, and 115. 
 
CHAPTER V. 
 
 AMMUNITION. 
 
 Troops in the field should not only be supplied with a sufficient 
 quantity of ammunition, but the men of the command should be 
 taught how to prepare it. Cartridges for small arms are made of 
 paper, in the following manner : Having prepared the paper, which 
 should be strong, but not too thick, by cutting it first into strips 
 eight and a halt inches wide, then cutting these strips crosswise into 
 smaller strips four and a half i.iches in width, and then cutting these 
 last diagonally, so that the pieces will be three inches on one side 
 and five and a half on the other; the pieces are then rolled on a 
 small cylindrical stick of the same diameter as the ball to be used, 
 about six inches long, having a spherical cavity at one end and 
 rounded at the other. The paper is laid on a table with the side 
 perpendicular to the bavses next the workman, the broad end to the 
 left; the stick laid on it v/ith the concave end half an inch from 
 the broad edge of the paper, and enveloped in it once. The right 
 hand is then laid flat on the stick, and all the paper rolled on it. 
 The projecting end of the paper is now neatly folded down into the 
 concavity of the stick, pasted, and pressed on a ball imbedded in 
 the table for the purpose. 
 
 Instead of being pasted, these cylinders may be closed by choking 
 with a string, tied to the table, and having at i^he other end a stick 
 by wh*h to hold it. The convex end of the former is placed to the 
 left, and after the paper is rolled on, the fo7vner is taken in the left 
 hand, and a turn made around it with the choking string half an 
 inch from the end of the paper. Whilst the string is drawn tight 
 with the right hand, the former is held in the left with the fore- 
 finger resting on the end of the cylinder, folding it neatly down 
 upon the end of the former. The choke is then firmly tied with 
 twine. 
 
 For ball cartridges, make the cylind%rs and choke them as above 
 described, and the choke*^tied without cutting the twine. The for- 
 mer is then withdrawn, the ball put in, and the concave end of the 
 
AMMUNITION. 121 
 
 former put in after it. Thye half hitches are made a little above the 
 ball, and the twine cut oiF. 
 
 For ball and buckshot cartridges, make the cylinder as before, 
 insert three buckshot, fasten them with a half hitch, and insert and 
 secure the ball as before. 
 
 For buckshot cartridges, make the cylinder as before, insert four 
 tiers of three buckshot each, as at first, making a half hitch between 
 the tiers, and ending with a double hitch. 
 
 To fill the cartridges, the cylinders are placed upright in a box, 
 and the charge poured into each from a conical charger of the 
 appropriate size ; the mouths of the cylinders are now folded down 
 on the powder by two rectangular folds, and the cartridges bundled 
 in packages of ten. For this a folding box is necessary ; it is made 
 with two vertical sides at a distance from each other equal to five 
 diameters of the ball, and two diameters high. 
 
 The manner of preparing ammunition for artillery is found in the 
 Manual of Artillery in preceding chapter. 
 
122 
 
 AMMUNITION. 
 
 TABLE. 
 
 DIMENSIONS OF CARTRIDGE-BAGS. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 GQ 
 
 
 
 
 o> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 OQ 
 
 •ut-8 
 
 d 
 
 to 
 
 
 XO 
 
 05 
 
 x> 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 .< 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cc 
 
 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 s< 
 
 O 
 
 CO 
 
 •ui-oi 
 
 •rH 
 
 
 00 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 ' OJ 
 
 
 
 •9§0TS -Ut-g 
 
 c 
 
 
 c^ 
 
 rj5 
 
 CJ 
 
 J3 
 
 T? 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 
 
 •qoai-8 
 
 ^ 
 
 CO 
 
 00 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 -<1 
 
 
 .^- 
 
 
 
 (M 
 
 tH 
 
 
 
 
 
 en 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 (1> 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 OS 
 
 
 o 
 
 •qoui-oi; 
 
 fl 
 
 l> 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 "^ 
 
 
 00 
 
 s 
 
 
 U 
 
 
 
 
 
 (>J 
 
 T-l 
 
 
 T-( 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 0) 
 
 
 
 •ipd-si 
 
 
 c* 
 
 ■^ 
 
 OJ 
 
 T— 1 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 IF. 
 
 
 
 
 
 »o 
 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 <x> 
 
 1> 
 
 
 
 
 \o 
 
 0) 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 •jpd-8i 
 
 .s 
 
 "^ 
 
 T-H 
 
 T-H 
 
 I> 
 
 Tf 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 t— < 
 
 
 
 
 
 \rs 
 
 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 C/2 
 
 
 'iip^-fZ 
 
 rj 
 
 vo 
 
 
 00* 
 
 1— 1 
 
 oi 
 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 i^ 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 t^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 SJ 
 
 -a:; 
 
 
 
 
 UO 
 
 T— 1 
 
 
 vrt) 
 
 • 
 
 ; 
 
 O 
 
 1— ^ 
 
 
 •jpd-se 
 
 .:: 
 
 V-t 
 
 »— 1 
 
 CO 
 
 <^ 
 
 £ 
 
 00 
 
 rt 
 
 
 
 
 
 cc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 Oi 
 
 
 
 
 VO 
 
 yj 
 
 # 
 
 
 Mpd-st 
 
 • r^ 
 
 CO 
 
 
 00 
 
 1— < 
 
 
 o 
 
 1—1 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 <2 
 
 en 
 
 
 
 
 
 W) 
 
 o -rl 
 
 bD 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 W3 
 
 rQ 
 
 
 
 
 
 >-l 
 
 o 
 
 (*_ 
 o 
 
 ■ o i! 
 
 o. ro 
 •^ c 
 
 gee 
 o a 
 
 ■si 
 
 C3 
 
 o 
 
 t 
 
 1 
 
 
 0) 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fi 
 
 <<-l 
 
 
 (J3 
 
 
 
 
 # 
 
 
 
 4) 
 
 c 
 
 to 
 
 
 J5 
 O 
 
 13 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ce 
 
 C ji, 
 
 ,:;j 
 
 c 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 0) 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 1=) 
 
 
X3Sr D EX. 
 
 Field Fortifications. 
 
 . 
 
 
 PAGK. 
 
 
 
 PAGB. 
 
 Abatis, - 
 
 - - 
 
 - 
 
 26 
 
 Interior Slope of a Parapet, 
 
 - 
 
 5 
 
 Attack on Field Works 
 
 
 - 
 
 40 
 
 Inundations, 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 28 
 
 Attacking Houses, 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 42 
 
 Intrenching a Village 
 
 " 
 
 - 
 
 40 
 
 " Barricades, 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 43 
 
 Lunette, 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 12 
 
 Banquette, 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 9 
 
 Loopholes, 
 
 - 
 
 18 
 
 37 
 
 Berme, 
 
 
 - 
 
 9 
 
 Lines, 
 
 - 31, 
 
 32 
 
 34 
 
 Blockhouse, 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 19 
 
 " of Tenailles, 
 
 
 - 
 
 32 
 
 Bastioned Lines, 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 33 
 
 " with Jnvervals 
 
 or Brok< 
 
 in 
 
 
 Broken Lines, 
 
 
 - 
 
 34 
 
 Lines, - 
 
 - 
 
 . 
 
 34 
 
 Barricades, 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 37 
 
 Outlines of Field Works, 
 
 . 
 
 10 
 
 Caponniere, 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 14 
 
 Octagonal Redoubt, 
 
 - 
 
 . 
 
 17 
 
 Constructions, 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 16 
 
 Star Fort, 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 17 
 
 Chevaux-de-frise, 
 
 - 
 
 
 26 
 
 Obstacles, 
 
 . 
 
 - 
 
 25 
 
 Crows Feet, 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 27 
 
 Profi.le of an Intrenchnient, 
 
 - 
 
 3 
 
 CrfemailUre, 
 
 - 
 
 32 
 
 -33 
 
 Penetration of Shot, 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 5 
 
 Ditch, - - ^ 
 
 9, 14, 
 
 18, 
 
 24 
 
 Parapet, 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 5,8 
 
 Double Redans. 
 
 •• 
 
 - 
 
 14 
 
 Plongde, 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 8 
 
 Demi-Bastioned Forts, 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 18 
 
 Pentagonal Redoubt, 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 16 
 
 Defilading of Field Works, 
 
 - 
 
 20 
 
 Plane of Sight, - 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 20 
 
 Distribution of Workin 
 
 g Party 
 
 5 
 
 23 
 
 Defilade, 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 20 
 
 Dams, 
 
 - 
 
 28,, 
 
 29 
 
 Profiling, 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 23 
 
 Defence of Field Worl^ 
 
 s, 
 
 35 
 
 36 
 
 Palisades, 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 25 
 
 Exterior Slope of a Parapet, 
 
 r- 
 
 5 
 
 Pointed Stakes, - 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 27 
 
 Entanglement, - 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 27 
 
 Revetment, 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 6 
 
 Field Works, 
 
 - 
 
 3, 
 
 40 
 
 Redan, 
 
 - 
 
 11 
 
 12 
 
 Fascines;, 
 
 - 
 
 
 3,7 
 
 Redoubt, 
 
 - 12, 
 
 16, 
 
 17 
 
 Fascine Gads, - 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 7 
 
 Reduits, 
 
 
 
 30 
 
 Forts with Bastions, 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 17 
 
 Sand Bags, 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 7 
 
 Fraises, - 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 25 
 
 Sods of Turf, - 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 8 
 
 Fougasses, 
 
 
 27 
 
 28 
 
 Superior Slope of the 
 
 Parapet 
 
 > 
 
 8 
 
 Fortifying House.-. 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 38 
 
 Star Fort, 
 
 14, 15, 
 
 16, 
 
 17 
 
 Gabions, 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 6 
 
 Stockade Work, 
 
 
 
 19 
 
 Gun Batteries, - 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 8 
 
 Thickness of Parapet 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 5 
 
 Gorges of Works, 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 27 
 
 Terreplein, 
 
 - 
 
 . 
 
 9 
 
 Hexagonal Redoubt. 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 17 
 
 Triple Redan, 
 
 - 
 
 . 
 
 12 
 
 '• Star Fort, 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 17 
 
 Tambour, 
 
 - 
 
 . 
 
 19 
 
 Intrenchmonts, with 
 
 Flanking 
 
 
 Trous fJe loup, - 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 26 
 
 Arranuetnents. 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 4 
 
 T^tes do Pont, - 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 30 
 
V24 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Artillery, 
 
 Calibre, - 
 
 Carcasses, 
 
 Cominon Case, 
 
 Canister. 
 
 Dispari, • - 
 
 Guns, 
 
 Grape Shot, 
 
 Gur)po^vder, 
 
 Gun Platform. 
 
 Howitzers, 
 
 Hand Grenades, 
 
 Mortars, 
 
 Point-Blank, 
 
 I'AGE. 
 
 - 44 Powder, - ^ 
 
 - 47 Portfire, 
 
 - 48 Ricochet, 
 
 - 48 Range of Gun. - 
 
 - 44 Rockets, 
 
 44, 45 Round Shot, 
 
 - 48 Service Charge of Powder, 
 
 - 48 Shells, 
 
 - 49 Shrapnells, 
 ^ 46 Shell Fuze, 
 
 48 Trunnions, - » 
 
 - 46 Tangent-Scale, - 
 
 45. 46! Windage, 
 
 Manual for Light Artillery, 
 
 50 
 
 Attaching Shafts. 
 
 Coirnnands. 
 
 Cannoneers, 
 
 Changing Posts, 
 
 Coming into Action, 
 
 Detachments, 
 
 Duties of the Cannoneers, 
 
 Detaching Shafts, 
 
 Forming the Detachment, 
 
 44 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 - 45 
 
 - 48 
 
 45, 49 
 
 - 45 
 
 - 47 
 
 - 49 
 
 - 45 
 
 46, 47 
 
 - 47 
 
 - 48 
 
 - 44 
 
 - 44 
 
 - 44 
 
 56 
 
 561 Locking Rope, - 
 
 - 52i Moving the Piece by Means of 
 52| the Cannoneers, - - 57 
 
 - 55: Posts of the Detachments, - 51 
 
 - 60| Packing, - - 60, 61, 62 
 51, 58| Service of the Piece, - 52, 55 
 
 - 52j " several Pieces, - 58 
 
 - 57| Unhitching, - - 59, 60 
 
 - 51 j Unpacking, - - 60, 63, 64 
 
 Manual for Heavy Artillery, - 65 
 
 Battery, - - 66, 70] 
 
 Colunibiad, - - - 65 
 
 Calibre, - - - 66 
 
 Casemate, - - - 65 
 
 Detachments, - - 66, 67 
 
 Flank Casemate, - - 65 
 
 Garrison Artillery. - - 65 
 
 Guns, - - - - 65 
 
 Howitzer, - - - 65 
 
 Heavy Artillery, - - 66 
 
 Implements, - - 68, 69 
 
 Kinds of Ordnance. - - 66 
 
 Mortar, - - - - 
 
 Platform, 
 
 Service of the Piece, 
 Siege Artillery, 
 Sea-Coast Artillery, 
 Service of a Gun moimted on a 
 
 Siege Carriage, 
 Service of an 8-inch Siege How- 
 itzer mounted on a 24-pouBd- 
 iM- Siege Carriage, 
 
 AMMUN'lTinx, 
 
 65 
 66 
 65 
 65 
 65 
 
 681 
 
 78 
 
 Service of a lO-in#h Siege Mortar 
 
 Service of an 8-incu Siege Mor- 
 tar. - - -, . 
 
 Service of a Coehorn Mortar, - 
 
 Service of a 10-inch Sea-Coast 
 Mortar, 
 
 Service of a 13-inch Sea-Coa?t 
 Mortar, 
 
 Service of a Stone Mortar, 
 
 Service of a Gun mounted on a 
 Barbette Carriage, 
 
 Service of a Giin inounted on a 
 Casemate Carriage, 
 
 Service of an 8-inch Colnmbiad 
 mounted on a Casemate Car- 
 riage, - 
 
 Service of a 24-pilr. Howitzer 
 mounted on a Flank Casemate 
 Carriage, 
 
 Service of an 8 inch Columbiad 
 mounted on a Columbiad Car 
 riage. - 
 
 120 
 
 87 
 
 93 
 95 
 
 96 
 
 97 
 97 
 
 98 
 
 - 106 
 
 - Ill 
 
 11] 
 
 -115 
 
MILIT^VKY BOOKS. 
 
 Published and for sale by 
 
 J. W. RANDOLPH, Richmond, Va. 
 
 Al^o for sale bv Booksellers "onerallv. 
 
 INSTRUCTIONS 
 
 For Officers and Non-Commissioned Officers of Cavnhy, on Outpost Duty 
 
 BY 
 
 Lieut. Col. Von ARENTSCIIILBT, 
 
 First Hussars King's German Legion : 
 With an Abridgement of them by 
 
 Lieut. Col.. Tjje Hon. F. PONSONBY, 
 Twelfth Li^ht Dragoons. Price — 50 Cents. 
 
 DIRECTIONS 
 
 * FOR 
 
 COOKING BY TROOPS 
 
 CAMP AND HOSPITAL. 
 
 Prepared for the Army. With Essays on 
 
 "TAKING FOOD" and "WHAT FOOD." 
 
 BY 
 
 FLORENCE NIGHTINGALE. 
 
 Price — '25 CeiMS. 
 
 THE HAND BOOK 
 
 OF 
 
 V 
 
 Br 
 
 Captain JOSEPH ROBERTS, 
 
 Priop — Iff Cru<.<. Fourth RoLnnifMit ArtilleiN. I'. S Aiin\. 
 
SKIRMISH DUILI^ 
 
 FOR , 
 
 MOUNTED TROOPS. 
 
 By Capt. D. H. MAURY, C. S. A. 
 
 COOPER'S 
 
 CAVALRY TACTICS 
 
 AND A 
 
 MANUAL FOR COLT^S REVOLVER. 
 
 Price — 65 Cents. Willi Plates. 
 
 Capt. VIELE'S 
 
 H^ISTD BOOK 
 
 OF 
 
 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS AND ARTILLERY; 
 
 ALSO A 
 
 M.41AL FOR LIGHT Al HEAVY ARTILLERY, 
 
 Price~$l 25. • With Plates. 
 
 SOIElSrOE OIF" "W^K/! 
 
 TACTICS 
 
 FOR 
 
 OFFICERS 
 
 OF 
 
 INFANTRY, CAVALRY AND ARTILLERY. 
 
 Arranged and Compiled by 
 
 L. V. BUCKHOLTZ. 
 
 One Volume, l:2mo. Price — 75 Cents. 
 
 INFANTRY CAMP DUTY, FIELD FORTIFICA- 
 TION, AND COAST DEFENSE. 
 
 Prepared and Arranged by 
 
 Capt. L. v. BUCKHOLTZ. 
 
 With Plates. Ifimo.. mnslin. Price — 50 Cent?. 
 
Will be Published October 10th, 1861; 
 
 E[A.]SrD BOOK 
 
 FOR 
 
 CONTAINING 
 
 Practical Instructions in Campaign Duties — The Recruit — The Company — 
 The Regiment — The March — The Camp — Guard and Guard-Mounting 
 — Rations, and Mode of Cooking Them. With Ilhistrations. 
 
 By EGBERT L. VIELE, 
 
 LATE U. S. A. 
 
 Captain Engineers, Seventh Regiment, N. G. 
 Price — 75 Cents. 
 
 «*If this be Treason, make the most of it.'> 
 
 ANTICIPATIONS OF THE FUTURE, 
 
 TO SERVE AS 
 
 LESSONS FOR THE PRESENT TIME. 
 
 In the form of Extracts op Letters from, an English Resident in the 
 United Slates, to the London Times, from 1864 to 1870. 
 
 With an Appendix on the Causes and Consequences of the Independence 
 
 of the South. 
 
 By EDMUND RUFFIN. 
 
 12mo. muslin, 426 pages. Price $1 ; or $1 25 by mail, 
 
 FL^I^T_A.TION BOOK. 
 
 PLANTATION AND FARM INSTRUCTION. 
 REGULATION, RECORD, 
 
 INVENTORY AND ACCOUNT BOOK. 
 
 For the use of Managers of Estates, and for the better ordering and man- 
 agement of plantation and iarm business in many particulars. 
 
 BY A SOUTHERN PLANTER. 
 
 " Order is Heaven's first law." 
 New and improved edition, cap folio, half calf; price $1 50. Also u 
 larger edition, for Cotton Plantations; price $2. Either sent by mail, 
 post paid, for 2ri cent.s extra. 
 
s o u T H ]i; n ]sr 
 BOOK PUBLISHING HOUSE, 
 
 ESTJ^BIliISiaCEID 1833- 
 
 J. W. RANDOLPH, 
 
 BOOKSELLER, PUBLISHEB, STATIONER 
 
 AND 
 
 MXJSIO DEA.1L,ER, 
 
 Offers on the best terms for cash or approved credit, the largest assorimenl 
 of goods in his line to be found south of Philadelphia. 
 
 THE STOCK EMBRACES 
 
 LAW, MEDICINE, THEOLOGY. 
 
 HISTORY. BIOGRAPHY, POLITICS, 
 
 SCHOOL, CLASSICS, JUVENILE, NOVELS, 
 
 POETRY, and MISCELLANEOT!rS BOOKS, 
 
 In English and oiher languages. 
 
 Particular attention given ta the collection df Rare Work.^. Book.'* iiit- 
 p(»rted to order. 
 
 AMERICAN, 
 
 ENGLISH 
 
 AND 
 
 FRENCH STATIONERY, 
 
 Of the be.~t quality. 
 
 A large stock of STANDARD MUSIC, and all the New Popular Piece.< 
 are for sale soon as published. 
 
 BLANK BOOKS made to order, and all kinds of 
 
 BOOK-BINDING- executed in good style. 
 
 CATALOGUES will be mailed to all who send five cents to pay the 
 postage 
 
 OLD BOOKS 
 
 'Taken in Exchange for New Works. 
 
 J. W. RANDOLPH, 
 
 l-'l MAIN STREET, RICHMOND. VA, 
 
OFFERED TO THE TRADE AND FOR SALE BY 
 
 J. W. RANDOLPH, 
 
 121 Main street, Kichmond, Va. 
 
 HALL'S (EVERARD) DIGESTED INDEX OF THE ' 
 
 VIRGINIA REPORTS, containing all the points argued 
 and determined in the Court of Appeals of Virginia, from 
 Washington to third Leigh, inclusive, with a table of the 
 names of cases reported, 2 vols. 8vo, sheep, Richmond, 
 1825 and '35 P 00 
 
 HENING&MUNFORD. REPORTS OF CASES argued 
 and determined in the Supreme Court of Appeals of Virginia, 
 with select cases relating chiefly to points of practice decided 
 by the Superior Court of Chancery for the Richmond Dis- 
 trict, by W. W. Hening and W. Munford, a new and ojily 
 complete edition, with memoirs of the Judges whose deci- 
 sions are reported ; the present rules of the Court of Appeals, 
 and of the Chancery Court in Richmond ; references to sub- 
 sequent decisions of the Court of Apj)eals, and to existing 
 statutes in paria materia, with the points herein reported, 
 and a list of the cases overruled. Edited by B. B. Minor, 
 L. B., 4 vols. Svo, sheep, Richmond, 1854 20 00 
 
 JEFFERSON'S (THOMAS) REPORTS OF CASES de- 
 termined in the General Court of Virginia from 1730 to 
 1740, and from 1768 to 1772, half calf, Charlottesville, 1829, 2 50 
 
 LAWYER'S GUIDE. THE AMERICAN PLEADER 
 AND LAWYER'S GUIDE, in commencing, prosecuting 
 and defending actions at common law and suits in equity, 
 with full and correct precedents of pleadings in the several 
 cases which most frequently occur, adapted to the practice 
 of the United States, by W. W. Hening, 2 vols. Svo, sheep. 
 New York, 1811 and '26 8 00 
 
 MATTHEW'S (J. M.) GUIDE TO COMMISSIONERS 
 IN CHANCERY, with practical Forms for the discharge 
 of their duties, adapted to the new Code of Virginia, Svo, 
 sheep, Richmond, 1850 2 50 
 
 MATTHEW'S DIGEST OF THE LAWS OF VIRGINIA, 
 of a civil nature and of a permanent character, and a general 
 operation, illustrated by judicial decisions, to which are 
 
\ 
 
 prefixed the Constitutions of the United States and Virginia, 
 
 by J. M. Matthews, 2 vols. 8vo, sheep, Richmond, 1856-7, 12 00 
 
 THE SAME INTERLEAVED WITH WRITING PAPER 
 
 FOR NOTES, 2 vols 17 00 
 
 MUNFORD'S (WILLIAM) REPORTS OF CASES argued 
 and determined in the Supreme Court of Appeals of Vir- 
 ginia, 6 vols. Svo, sheep, Richmond and New York, 1812, 
 &c 36 00 
 
 PATTON & HEATH. A GENERAL INDEX TO 
 GRATTAN'S REPORTS, from second to eleventh, in- 
 clusive, by J. M. Patton and R. B. Heath, Svo, sheep, 
 Richmond, 1856 3 50 
 
 PATTON & HEATH. REPORTS OF CASES decided 
 in the Special Court of Appeals of Virginia, held at Rich- 
 mond, and a General Index to Grattan's Reports, from 2d 
 to 11th vol., inclusive, by J. M. Patton and R B. Heath, 
 vol. 1, 8vo, sheep, Richmond, 1856 6 00 
 
 PATTON & HEATH. REPORTS OF CASES decided 
 in the Special Court of Appeals, held in Richmond 
 1855-6-7, by J. M. Patton and R. B. Heath, 2 vols. 8vo, 
 sheep, Richmond, 1855-7 7 00 
 
 QUARTERLY LAW JOURNAL, A. B. Guigon, Editor, 
 vol. 1, 1856, vol. 2, 1857, vol. 3, 1858, vol. 4, 1859, 8vo, 
 sheep, Richmond, per volume 5 00 
 
 RANDOLPH'S (PEYTON) REPORTS OF CASES argued 
 and determined in the Court of Appeals of Virginia, 6 vols. 
 Svo, sp. Richmond, Va., 1823, &c 24 00 
 
 RITCHIE'S (THOMAS, Jr.) TRIAL. A full report, 
 embracing all the evidence and arguments in the case of 
 the Commonwealth of Virginia vs. T. Ritchie, Jr., for the 
 killing of John Hampden Pleasants, to which is added an 
 appendix showing the action of the Court in relation to the 
 other parties connected with the said case, Svo, paper. New 
 York, 1846 25 
 
 VIRGINIA. PAY AND MUSTER ROLLS OF THE 
 VIRGINIA MILITIA IN THE WAR OF 1812, Svo 
 half calf, Richmond, 1851-2 15 00 
 
 VIRGINIA CASES. A Collection of Cases decided by the 
 General Court of Virginia, chiefly relating to the Penal 
 Laws of the Commonwealth, commencing 1789 and ending 
 1826, copied from the Records of the said Court, with ex- 
 planatory notes, by Judges Brockenbrough and Holmes, 
 second edition, with abstracts prefixed to the cases, 2 vols, 
 in 1, Svo, sheep, Richmond, 1826 and 1853 6 00 
 
 VIRGINIA LAW OF CORPORATIONS, ACTS OF 
 THE GENERAL ASSEMBLY compiled from the code 
 of Virginia, together with an act passed in 1837, relating 
 to Manufacturing and Mining Companies, Svo, paper, 
 Richmond, 1853 5;') 
 
WYTHE'S (GEO.) REPORTS. Decisions of cases in 
 Virginia of (he High Court of Chancery, with remarks upon 
 Decrees by the Court of Appeals, reversing some of those 
 d'^cisions, by George Wythe, 2d and only complete edition. 
 With a Memoir of the author. Analysis of the Cases, and 
 an Index, by t^. B. Minor, L. B. And with an Appendix, 
 containing references to cases in pari materia, an essay on 
 lapse, joint tenants and tenants in common, &,c., &.C., by 
 VVm. Green, Esq. 8vo, slieep. Richmond, 1852 4 00 
 
 WHIT'^. ACRE vs. BLACK ACRE, a Case at Law, re- 
 ported by J. G., Esq., a retired barrister of Lincolnshire, 
 England, 18mo, mus., Richmond, 18.^6 75 
 
 VIRGINIA. RULES OF THE COURT OF APPEALS 
 from its establislunent to the present time. Also, Rules of 
 tiie District Courts of Fredericksburg and Williamsburg. 
 8vo., pa[?er. Richmond 10 
 
 GILMER'S (F. VV.) VIRGINIA REPORTS. 8vo., calf. 
 
 Richmond. 1821 2 00 
 
 GRAT TAN'S (P. R.) VIRGINIA REPORTS. 15 vols , 
 
 8vo, call^. Richmond, 1845-60. Per volume 4 00 
 
 LEIGH'S (B. VV.) VIRGINIA REPORTS. 12 vols., Svo, 
 
 calf. Richmond, 1830-44. Per volume 4 00 
 
 ROBINSON'S (C.) VIRGINIA REPORTS. 2 vols., Svo, 
 
 calf. Richmond, 1843-4. Per volume 4 00 
 
 HENING (VV. VV.) & SHEPHERD'S (S.) STATUTES 
 OF VIRGINIA from 1619 to 1807. 16 vols., Svo, sheep. 
 Richmond, 1823-36 . ... 13 00 
 
 VIRGINIA ACTS OF ASSEMBLY from 1808 to 1860. 
 Svo, half sheep. Richmond 
 
 SELECTIONS OF THE MOST IMPORTANT POR- 
 TIONS OF THE REPORTS OF THE REVISOR'S 
 OF VIRGINIA CODE. With notes by A. H. Sands. 
 Svo, sheep. In press 
 
 :e»oil.itios. 
 
 tucker's (h st. george) lectures on natu- 
 RAL LAW, also Lectures on Government, 12mo, muslin, 
 Charlottesville, 1844 75 
 
 ANTICIPATIONS OF THE FUTURE, TO SERVE AS 
 LESSONS FOR THE PRESENT TIME. Extracts 
 from letters written from Washington to the London Times 
 during the years 1864-5-6-7-8. 12mo, mus., Richmond, 
 I860 100 
 
 TUCKER'S (H. ST. GEORGE) LECTURES ON CON- 
 STITUTIONAL LAW, for the use of the Law Class of 
 the University of Virginia, 12mo, mus., Riclimond, 1843.. 75 
 
 VIRGINIA POLITICS. A History of the Political Cam- 
 paign in Va. in 1855, to which is added a review of the 
 position of parties in the Union, and a statement of the 
 political issues distinguishing them on the eve of the Presi- 
 
dential Campaig;n of 1856, by J. P. Hambleton, M. D., 8vo, 
 mus., Richmond, 1856 2 50 
 
 VIRGINIA CONVENTION. Proceeding and Debates of 
 the Va. State Convention of 1829-30, to which are sub- 
 joined the new Constitution of Virginia, and the votes of 
 the people, 8vo, calf, Richmond, 1830 5 00 
 
 VIRGINIA STATISTICS. Documents containing statis- 
 tics ordered to be printed by the State Convention sitting 
 in the city of Richmond, 1850-51, 8vo, calf, Richmond, 
 1851 2 50 
 
 VIRGINIA CONVENTION. Journal, Acts and Proceed- 
 ings of a General Convention of the State of Virginia as- 
 sembled at Richmond 1850, 8vo, half calf, Richmond, 1850. 5 00 
 
 VIRGINIA CONVENTION 1850-51. Register of the De- 
 bates and Proceedings of the Virginia Reform Convention, 
 (imperfect,) 8vo, half sheep, Richmond, 1851 3 00 
 
 VIRGINIA. Journal of the Senate and House of Delegates 
 for various years. Richmond. 
 
 VIRGINIA. Journal of the Convention of 1776. 4to, half 
 
 sheep. Richmond, 1816 2 00 
 
 ELLETT'S ESSAYS ON THE LAW OF TRADE, in 
 reference to the Works of Internal Improvement in the 
 U.S. 8vo, mus., Richmond, 1839 150 
 
 LETTERS OF CURTIUS, written by the late John Thom- 
 son, of Petersburg; to which is added a Speech delivered 
 by him in August, '95, on the British Treaty ; to which a 
 short Sketch of his Life is prefixed. 12mo, paper. Rich- 
 mond, 1804 1 00 
 
 JEFFERSON. Memoir, Correspondence and Miscellanies 
 from the Papers of Thomas Jefferson. Edited by Thomas 
 Jefferson Randolph. 4 vols,, 8vo, boards, Charlottesville, 
 1829 5 00 
 
 JEFFERSON. Observations on the Writings of Thomas 
 Jefferson, with particular reference to the attack they con- 
 tain on the Memory of the late Gen'l Henry Lee. In 
 series of letters, by H, Lee. 2nd edition. With an Intro- 
 duction and Notes, by Charles C. Lee. 8vo, mus. Phila- 
 delphia, 1839 1 75 
 
 LONDON (D.H.) ON THE COMMERCIAL, AGRICUL- 
 TURAL AND INTELLECTUAL INDEPENDENCE 
 OF VIRGINIA AND THE SOUTH. 8vo, paper. Rich- 
 mond, 1860 25 
 
 VIRGINIAN (THE) HISTORY OF THE AFRICAN 
 COLONIZATION. (This contains, among other docu- 
 ments, portions of the Debate on Slavery in the Virginia 
 Legislature of 1832.) Edited by Rev. P. Slaughter. 8vo, 
 mus., Richmond, 1855 1 00 
 
 RUFFIN'S (EDMUND) AFRICAN COLONIZATION 
 UNVEILED. Slavery and Free Labor described and 
 
compared. The Political Economy of Slatrery ;: (Sr*,- the' 
 Institution considered in regard to its influence oTii public' 
 wealth and the general welfare. Two Great Evili* of Vir- 
 ginia, and their one Common Remedy, 8vo, pa, Rich- 
 mond, 1860. The lour pamphlets, each ,,.... 10 
 
 BEVERLY'S (ROBERT) HISTORY OF VIRGINIA. In 
 four parts. I. The history of the settlement of Virginia, 
 and the government thereof, to the year 1706. II. The 
 natural productions and conveniences of the country, suited 
 to trade and improvement. III. The native Indians, their 
 religion, laws and customs, in war and peace. IV. The 
 present state of the country, as to the polity of the gov- 
 ernment, and the improvements of the land, to 10th of 
 June, 1720. By Robert Beverly, a native of the place. 
 Re-printed from the author's second revised London edi- 
 tion of 1792, with an introduction by Charles Campbell, 
 author of the "Colonial History of Virginia." 14 plates, 
 
 8vo, mus. Richmond, 1855 2 50 
 
 AN ACCOUNT OF DISCOVERIES IN THE WEST 
 until 1519, and of Voyages to and along the Atlantic Coast 
 of North America from 1520 to 1573. Prepared for the 
 Virginia Historical and Philosophical Society, by Conway 
 Robinson. 8vo,mus. Richmond, 1848. (Published at $5.) 2 50 
 JEFFERSON'S (THOMAS) NOTES ON THE STATE 
 OF VIRGINIA. A new edition, prepared by the author, 
 containing many new notes never before published. 
 
 It is printed from President Jetierson's copy (^tockdale's 
 London edition of 1787) of the Notes on Virginia, with 
 his last additions (they are numerous) and corrections in 
 manuscript, and four maps of Caves, Mounds, Fortifica- 
 tions, he. 
 
 Letters from Gen. Dearborn and Judge Gibson, relating 
 to the Murder of Logan, &c. 
 
 Fry and Jetierson's Map of Virginia, Maryland, Dela- 
 ware, and Pennsylvania — very valuable on account of the 
 Public Places and Private Residences, which are not to be 
 found on any other Map. 
 
 A Topographical Analysis of Virginia, for 1790 — a curi- 
 ous and useful sheet foi historical reference. 
 
 Translations of all Jefferson's Notes in Foreign Lan* 
 guages, by Prof. Scheie de Vere, of the University of 
 Virginia. 
 
 Svo, mus. Richmond, 1853 2 50 
 
 SMITH'S (M.) GEOGRAPHICAL VIEW OF THE 
 BRITISH POSSESSIONS IN NORTH AMERICA. 
 18mo, sheep. Baltimore, 1814 85 
 
6 
 
 VIRGINIA CONVENTION OF 1776: Historical and Bio- 
 graphical. By H. B. Grip;sby. 8vo, mns. Richmond, T855. 1 50 
 
 OREGON, OUR RIGHT AND TITLE: containing- an 
 account of the condition of the Ore^^on Territory, its soil, 
 climate and geo:2;raphiral position ; together with a state- 
 ment of the claims of Russia, Spain, Great Britain, and 
 the United States. Accompanied with a map prepared by 
 the author. By Wyndham Robertson, jr., of Virginia. 
 8vo, paper. Washington, 1846 50 
 
 HOT SPRINGS. The Invalid's Guide to the Virginia Hot 
 Springs, with cases illustrative of their effects. By Thos. 
 Goode, M. D. 32mo, cloth. Richmond, 1846 25 
 
 VIRGINIA. Report on the Soils of Powhatan County. By 
 W. Gilham, Prof. Va. Military Institute. With a Map. 
 8vo, paper Richmond. 1857 35 
 
 BIRD. WESTOVER MANUSCRIPTS, containing the his- 
 tory of the dividing line betwixt Virginia and North Ca- 
 rolina. A Journey to the Land of Eden, A. D. 1733; and 
 
 ^ A Proo^ress to the Mines, written from 1728-36, and now 
 first publislied. By W. Bird, of Westover. 8vo, boards. 
 Petersburg, 1841. New edition in press 3 00 
 
 BLAND PAPERS, being a selection from the manuscripts 
 of Col. T. Bland, jr., of Prince George county, Va.; to 
 which are prefixed an Introduction and Memoir edited by 
 Charles Campbell. 2 vols, in one, 8vo, h'f ro. Peters- 
 burg, 1840 3 00 
 
 VIRGINIA POLITICS. A History of the Political Cam- 
 paign in Virginia in 1855; to which is added a review of 
 the position of Parties in the Union, and a statement of the 
 political issues distinguishing them on the eve of the Pre- 
 sidential Campaign of 1856. By J. P. Hambleton, M. D. 
 8vo, mus. Richmond, 1856 2 50 
 
 VIRGINIA CONVENTION. Proceeding and Debates of 
 the Virginia State Convention of 1829-30, to which are 
 subjoined the New Constitution of Virginia, and the votes 
 of the people. 8vo, calf. Richmond, 1830 5 00 
 
 VIRGINIA. Pay and Muster Rolls of the Virginia Militia 
 
 in the War of 1812. 8vo, half calf. Richmond, 1851-2. 15 00 
 
 VIRGINIA STATISTICS. Documents constaining statis- 
 tics ordered to be printed by the State Convention sitting 
 in the city of Richmond, 1850-51. 8vo, calf. Richmond, 
 1851 % 2 50 
 
 VIRGINIA CONVENTION. Journal, Acts and Proceed- 
 ings of a General Convention of the State of Virginia, as- 
 sembled at Richmond, 1850. 8vo, half calf. Richmond, 
 1850 5 00 
 
 VIRGINIA HISTORICAL SOCIETY COLLECTIONS, 
 ADDRESSES, &c. (Contents: Stuart's Indian Wars, 
 1763 ; Grace Sherwood's Trial, 1705 ; Address in 1833 by 
 
J. p. Gushing; in 1851 by W. H. Macfarland ; in 1852 by 
 H. A. Washington ; in 1853 by H. B. Grigsby ; in 1856 by 
 R. M. T. Hunter; in 1856 by J P. Holcombe.) 8vo, half 
 turkey. Richmond, 1833-56 5 00 
 
 VIRGINIA CONVENTION, 1850-51. Register of the De- 
 bates and Proceedings of the Vir2:inia Reform Convention, 
 (imperfect.) 8vo, half sheep. Riclimond, 1851 3 00 
 
 VIRGINIA. A Comprehensive Description of Virginia and 
 the District of Cohimbia, containing a copious collection 
 of geographical, statistical, political, commercial, reli- 
 gious, moral and miscellaneous information, chiefly from 
 original sources, by Joseph Martin; to which is added a 
 History of Virginia, from its first settlement to the year 
 1754, with an abstract of the principal events from that 
 period to the Independence of Virginia, by W. H. Brock- 
 enbrough, formerly Librarian at the University of Virgi- 
 nia, and afterwards Judge of the United States Court of 
 Florida, 8vo, sp. Richn)ond ^ , 2 00 
 
 MAURY. Paper on the Gulf Stream and Currents of the 
 Sea, read before the National Institute at its annual meet- * 
 ing in 1844, by M. F. Maury, Lieut. U. S. Navy. 8vo, 
 pa. Richmond, 1844 13 
 
 BURKE. The Virginia Mineral Springs, with remarks on 
 their use, the Diseases to which they are applicable, an<l 
 in which they are contra-indicated; accompanied by a 
 Map of Routes and Distances. A new work — 2d edition. 
 Improved and enlarged. By W. Burke, M.D, 12mo, 
 muslin. Richmond, 1853 75 
 
 COTTOM'S EDITION OF RICHARDSON'S ALMA- 
 NAC. 24mo, paper, Gc. Per dozen, 25c ; per gross, 
 $2.50. Containing, besides the twelve calendar pages 
 and astronomical calculations, a Jewish Calendar, Garden- 
 er's Monthly Instructor, List of the Virginia Senators, 
 Members of Congress, Senate and House of Delegates; 
 Virginia and North Carolina State Governments; State 
 and Federal Courts of Virginia, North Carolina, Maryland, 
 and the District of Columbia; Conjectures of the Weather, 
 Equation or Time Tables, Receipts, Anecdotes, &c. 
 Published annually. 
 
 JEFFERSON & CABELL. Early history of the Univer- 
 sity of Virginia, as contained in the Letters of (during 
 the years from 1810 to 1826) Thos. Jefferson and Joseph 
 C. Cabell, hitherto unpublished; with an Appendix con- 
 sisting of Mr. Jelferson's bill lor a complete system of 
 education, and other illustrative documents; and an In- 
 troduction, comprising a brief historical sketch of the 
 University, and a biographical notice of Joseph C. Cabell. 
 
 8vo, muslin. Richmond, 1856 2 50 
 
 JUBILEE AT JAMESTOWN, VA. Report of Proceed- 
 ings in Commemoration of the 13lh of May, the Second 
 
8 
 
 Centesimal Anniversary of the Settlement of Virp;inia, 
 containing the Order of Procession, the Prayer of Bishop 
 Madison, the Orations, the Odes and Toasts; together 
 with the Proceedings at Williamsburg on the 15th, the 
 day when the Convention of Virginia assembled in the old 
 Capitol, declared her Independent, and recommended a 
 similar procedure to Congress, and to the other States. 
 8vo, paper. Petersburg, 1807 1 00 
 
 VIRGINIA. Journal of the Senate and House of Delegates 
 for various years, Richmond. 
 
 VIRGINIA. Journal of the Convention of 1776. 4to, half 
 
 sheep. Richmond, 1816 2 00 
 
 JEFFERSON. Memoir, Correspondence and Miscellanies 
 from the Papers of Thos. Jetferson. Edited by Thos. 
 Jetferson Randolph. 4 vols., 8v, boards. Charlottesville, 
 1829 5 00 
 
 JEFFERSON. Observations on the Writings of Thomas 
 Jefferson, with particular reference to the attack they 
 contain on the Memory of the late Gen'l Henry Lee. In 
 
 ♦series of letters by H. Lee. 2nd edition. With an. Intro- 
 duction and Notes, by Chas. C. Lee. 8vo, mus. Phila- 
 delphia, 1839 1 75 
 
 -A.a-PJ,IOTJX.T-Cri^E. 
 
 RUFFIN'S (EDMUND) FARMER'S REGISTER. 10 
 
 vols., 8vo, half roan 30 00 
 
 RUFFIN'S (EDMUND) PRIZE ESSAY ON AGRICUL- 
 TURAL EDUCATION. 2nd edition, 8vo, paper 10 
 
 RUFFIN'S (EDMUND) AGRICULTURAL ESSAYS: 
 Containing articles on' the theory and practice of draining 
 (in all its branches:) advantages of ploughing flat land 
 in wide beds; on clover culture and the use and value of 
 the products; management of wheat harvests ; harvesting 
 corn fodder; on the manner of propagation and habits of 
 the moth or weevil, and means to prevent its ravages ; 
 inquiry into the causes of the existence of prairies, savan- 
 nas and deserts, and the peculiar condition of soils which 
 favor or prevent the growth of trees ; depressed condition 
 of lower Virginia; apology for "book farmers;" fallow; 
 usefulness of snakes ; embanked tide marshes and mill 
 ponds as causes of disease ; on the sources of malaria, or 
 of autumnal diseases, and means of prevention ; on the 
 culture, uses and value of the southern pea, (Ruffin's Prize 
 Essay of November, 1854,) and especially as a manuring 
 crop.' 12mo, half bound. Richmond, 1855 125 
 
 RUFFIN. A.n Essay on Calcareous Manures. By Edmund 
 Ruffin, a practical farmer of Virginia from 1812; founder 
 and sole editor of the Farmer's Register; Member and 
 
9 
 
 Secretary of the former State Board of Agriculture ; for- 
 merly Agricultural Surveyor of the State of South Caro- 
 lina: and President of the Virginia State Agricultural 
 Society. 5th edition, amended and enlarged, with plates. 
 Fine edition, 8vo, library style, $2; cheap edition, l2mo, 
 
 half roan or mus. Richmond, 1852 1 2a 
 
 PLANTATION AND FARM INSTRUCTION, Regula- 
 tion, Record, Inventory, and Account Book, and for the 
 better Ordering and Management of Plantation and Farm 
 Business in every particular. By a Southern Planter. 
 " Order is Heaven's First Law." New edition printing. 
 
 THE O H. O a-^2' _ 
 
 MAGRUDER 8c ORVIS' DEBATE on the Punishment of 
 the Wicked, and on the Kingdom of God. 12mo, muslin. 
 Richmond, 1855 • •':■■' ^^ 
 
 WALSH'S ( REV. J. T.) NATURE AND DURATION 
 OF FUTURE PUNISHMENT. 12mo, muslin. Rich- 
 mond. 1857.. '. ••;••;•/;;; ^^ 
 
 MEMOIR AND SERMONS OF THE REV. WILLIAM 
 
 DUVALL, City Missionary. By the Rev. C. Walker. 
 
 With a portrait. 12mo, mus. Richmond, 1854 50 
 
 STRINGFELLOW'S ( T., D-D. ) STATISTICAL AND 
 
 SCRIPTURAL VIEW OF SLAVERY. 4th edition, 
 
 l2mo, mus. Richmond, 1856 50 
 
 FAMILY CHRISTIAN ALBUM. Edited by Mrs. E P. 
 
 Elam. 8vo, mus. Richmond, 1855 150 
 
 FLAVEL'S WORKS. Balm of the Covenant. View of 
 
 the Soul of Man, &c. 8vo, half roan. Richmond, 1828.. 60 
 BLAIR. Sermons of Rev. John D. Blair, collected from his 
 
 manuscripts. 8vo, sheep. Richmond, 1825 50 
 
 BARTLEY'S (J. AVIS) POEMS. Lays of Ancient Vir- 
 ginia, &.c. 12mo, mus. Richmond, 1855 ■. 75 
 
 MOCK (THE) AUCTION. Ossawatamie Sold ! A Mock 
 Heroic Poem ; with Portraits and Tableaux, illustrative of 
 the character and actions of the world-renowned Order of 
 Peter Funks. By a Virginian. 12mo, mus. 10 tinted 
 plates. Richmond, 1860 • 75 
 
 CARTER. Mugffi, by Nugator; or Pieces in Prose and 
 Verse. By St. Ledger L. Carter. 24mo, half roan. Bal- 
 timore, 1844 :••••/•••.••;••, ^^ 
 
 BETHEL HYMNS. A Collection of Original Spiritual 
 Songs. By Mrs Elizabeth Sowers, of Clark county, Va. 
 48mo, sheep. Richmond, 1849. . •••"•". ^^ 
 
 FARMER'S (C. M.) FAIRY OF THE STREAM, and 
 
 other Poems. 12mo, boards. Richmond, 1847 50 
 
10 
 
 COURTNEY'S (REV J.) SELECTION OF HYMNS. 
 
 24mo, sheep. Richmond, 1831 35 
 
 SOUOOL. 
 
 VAUGHAN'S (S. A.) ABECEDARIAN; OR, FIRST 
 BOOK FOR CHILDREN. Designed to render the learn- 
 ing of the Alphabet, and of Elementary Spelling and Defin- 
 ing, pleasing and intellectual; and to fix in the mind habits 
 of attention to the force of letters in the formation of 
 words, and to the meaning of words, and through their ap- 
 plication to their appropriate objects, to inculcate the love 
 of Nature and reverence of Nature's God. 12mo, roan 
 back. Richmond 1.5 
 
 YOUNG (THE) AMERICAN'S PRIMER, OR FIRST 
 
 BOOK. 24mo, paper. Richmond, per dozen 25 
 
 SCHOOLER'S (SAMUEL) ELEMENTS OF DESCRIP- 
 TIVE GEOMETRY, the Point, the Straight Line, and 
 
 the Plane. 4to, mus, Richmond, 1853 2 00 
 
 The paper, type, and plates, are in the finest style of the 
 arts ; and the book, altogether, has been pronounced equal, 
 if not superior, to any English, French, or American work 
 on the subject. 
 
 GARNETT'S (JAMES M.) LECTURES ON FEMALE 
 EDUCATION, AND THE GOSSIP'S MANUAL. 3rd 
 edition, 18mo, sheep. Richmond, 1825 50 
 
 C^SAR, with English Notes. By Samuel Schooler. In 
 preparation. 
 
 STRINGFELLOW'S ( T., D.D.) STATISTICAL AND 
 SCRIPTURAL VIEW OF SLAVERY. Fourth edition, 
 12mo, mus. Richmond, 1856 50 
 
 FLETCHER'S (JOHN) STUDIES ON SLAVERY. 8vo, 
 
 sheep. Natchez, 1852 2 00 
 
 DEW. An Essay on Slavery. By T. R. Dew, late Presi- 
 dent of William and Mary College. 2d edition, 8vo, pa- 
 per. Richmond, 1849 50 
 
 RUFFIN'S (EDMUND) AFRICAN COLONIZATION 
 UNVEILED. Slavery and Free Labor described and 
 compared. The political Economy of Slavery ; or the In- 
 stitution considered in regard to its influence on public 
 w^ealth and the general welfare. Two Great Evils of Vir- 
 ginia, and their one Common Remedy. 8vo, pa. Rich- 
 mond, 1860. Each 10 
 
 UNCLE ROBIN IN HIS CABIN IN VIRGINIA, AND 
 TOM WITHOUT ONE IN BOSTON. By J. W. Page. 
 2nd edition, plates, 12mo, muslin. Richmond, 1853 75 
 
 WHITE ACRE vs. BLACK ACRE, a Case at Law, re- 
 ported by J. G., Esq., a retired barrister of Lincolnshire, 
 England, 18mo, mus. Richmond, 1856 75 
 
11 
 
 ONJiu^SOTsriO. 
 
 DOVE'S (JOHN) VIRGINIA TEXT BOOK OF ROYAL 
 
 ARCH MASONRY. Plates, 12tno, nius. Richmond, 1853, 1 25 
 
 DOVE'S (JOHN) HISTORY OF THE GRAND LODGE 
 OF VIRGINIA, AND ANCIENT CONSTITUTIONS 
 OF MASONRY. ISmo, muslin. Richmond, 1804 75 ' 
 
 DOVE'S (JOHN, M.D.) MASONIC TEXT BOOK. 2nd 
 
 edition. Plates, 12mo, mus. Richmond, 1854 1 25 
 
 REMINISCENCES OF A VIRGINIA PHYSICIAN. By 
 
 Prof. P. S. Rnter. 2 vols., r2mo. paper. Lonisville, 1849, 50 
 
 SOUTHERN AND SOUTH-WESTERN SKETCHES. 
 Fun, Sentiment and Adventure ! Edited by a Gentleman 
 of Richmond. 18mo, mus. Richmond 60 
 
 TUCKER. Gertrude. A Novel. By Judge Tucker, Pro- 
 fessor of William and Mary College. 8vo, paper. Rich- 
 mond, 1845 35 
 
 UNCLE ROBIN IN HIS CABIN IN VIRGINIA. AND 
 
 TOM WITHOUT ONE IN BOSTON. By J. W. Page. , , 
 
 2nd edition, plates, r2mo, mus. Richmond, 1853 75 n* # 
 
 SKETCHES OF CHARACTER, ( Randolph, Wirt, Ken- 
 ton, &c.) AND TALES FOUNDED ON FACT. By 
 F.W.Thomas. 8vo, boards. Louisville, 1849 25 
 
 MICHAEL BONHAM, OR THE FALL OF BEXAR. 
 A Tale of Texas. In five parts. By a Southerner. 8vo, 
 paper. Richmond, 1852 25 
 
 EDITH ALLEN, OR SKETCHES OF LIFE IN VIR- 
 GINIA, By Lawrence Neville, l2mo,raus. Richmond, 
 1855 1 00 
 
 JVCXJSIO- 
 
 EVERETT'S (Dr. A, B.) ELEMENTS OF VOCAL 
 MUSIC ; including a Treatise on Harmony, and a Chapter 
 on Versification. Designed as a text-book for teachers 
 and pupils in Female Seminaries, Male Academies, Sing- 
 ing Classes, etc., etc., and for private study and reference. 
 2nd and enlarged edition. ISmo, mus. Richmond, 1860, 50 
 
 EVERETT'S (L. C. & Dr. A. B.) NEW THESAURUS 
 MUSICUS, OR U. S. COLLECTION OF CHURCH 
 MUSIC; constituting the most complete variety of new 
 Psalm and Hymn Tunes, Sentences, Anthems, Chants, &c. 
 for the use of the Choir, the Congregation and the Singing 
 School, ever ofl'ored to the American people. Comprising 
 also all the popular old choir and congregational tunes in 
 general use. Music, 8vo, boards, Richmond, 1S60.. ... . 1 00 
 
• >' 
 
 '■ si^/^^ '"^-krJUi^s 
 
 
 12 
 
 WINKLER'S HINTS TO PIANO-FORTE PLAYERS. 
 
 12mo, boards. Richmond, 1847 25 
 
 LUMBER (THE) DEALER'S ASSISTANT, OR COM- 
 PLETE TABLES OF THE MEASUREMENTS OF 
 TIMBER, Sec. — showing the quantity in feet and inches 
 in any number of plank or scantling, from one to fifty ; of 
 any length in feet or half feet, from eight to twenty-two 
 feet long; of any width in inches and half inches, from 
 three to twenty inches wide. By George S. Sutherlin. 
 l2mo, half sheep. Richmond, 1849 50 
 
 VIRGINIA JUSTICE'S RECORD BOOK OF JUDG- 
 MENTS. Cap size, half bound 150 
 
 PAJOT'S OBSTETRIC TABLES, translated from the 
 French, and arranged by O. A. Grenshaw, M. D., und J. 
 B. McCaw, M. D. 4to, boards. Richmond, 1856 125 
 
 PHYSICIAN'S TABULATED DIARY, designed to facili- 
 tate the study of Disease at the Bedside. By a Physician 
 of Virginia. Pocket size. Muslin. Richmond, 1856.. . . 50 
 
 SOUTHERN LITERARY MESSENGER. 29 vols., 8vo, 
 
 in numbers. Richmond, 1834-59 100 00 
 
 Ocf^Most of the volumes or numbers are for sale separate. 
 
 RANDOLPH'S POCKET DIARY AND DAILY MEMO- 
 DANDUM BOOK. Richmond, 186— . 18mo, half bound, 
 35c.; tucks 60 
 
 RANDOLPH'S POCKET DIARY, DAILY MEMORAN- 
 DUM AND ACCOUNT BOOK. Richmond, 186-. Half 
 bound, 75c.; tucks 1 00 
 
 LIBRARY CASES, OR BOXES, in neat book form, very 
 convenient and useful for j)reserving valuable pamphlets 
 and magazines. 8vo. roan back 60 
 
 SKETCHES OF CHARACTER, ( Randolph, Wirt, Ken- 
 ton, &c.,) AND TALES FOUNDED ON FACT, ^y 
 F. W. Thomas. Svo, boards. Louisville, 1849 25 
 
 EDGAR'S SPORTSMAN'S HERALD & STUD BOOK 
 
 Svo, sp. New York, 1833 150 
 
 WATER CURE. By Dr. J. B. Williams, and others. With 
 comments and explanatory remarks on bathing for invalids, 
 &,c., by J. Timberlake. 18mo, paper. Richmond, 1853. . 25 
 
 THE PRACTICAL MINER'S OWN BOOK 8c GUIDE. 
 By J. Budge. With additions by J. Atkins. Plates, 12mo, 
 muslin. Richmond, 1860. 2 00 
 
 THE CARPENTER'S GUIDE IN STAIR-BUILDING 
 AND HAND-RAILING, based upon Plain and Practical 
 Principles, with sufficient explanations to inform without 
 confusing the learner. By Patrick O'Neill, Practical 
 Stair-Builder. Folio, mus. Richmond 2 00 
 
>>1 
 
MILITARY BOOKS, 
 
 PUBLISHED BY 
 
 J. W. RANDOLPH 
 
 COOPER & MAURY'S 
 
 Pfice,. 65 Cts. 
 
 : ii . «>»» 
 
 BTJCKHOLTZ'S 
 
 PriC3 75 Cts. 
 
 a 
 
 BUCKHOLTZ'S 
 CAMP DUTY, FIELD FOETIFICATION 
 
 COAST DEFENCE. 
 
 Price 50 Cts. 
 
 — > «q i>» » 
 
 COOEIN& BY TEOOPS, 
 
 Price 26 Cts. 
 
 ox 
 
 OUT-P 
 
 FOR 
 
 TY, 
 
 ' Price 50 Qts. 
 
 TiX, 
 
 Pries 75 Cts. 
 
 . •A^IJT.Lli 
 
 Tl 3 
 
 Price 75 Cts. 
 
 ■r^